Ariel JGK

MAINTENANCE &
REPAIR MANUAL
ARIEL CORPORATION
35 Blackjack Rd.
Mount Vernon, OH 43050
740.397.0311
www.arielcorp.com
JGE / JGH / JGK / JGT

Heavy Duty Balanced Opposed Reciprocating Compressors
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T
Table of Contents
General Safety for Reciprocating Compressors vi
Throw and Data Plate Locations vii
Other Ariel Resources viii
Ariel Website viii
Ariel Technical and Service Schools viii
Ariel Contact Information viii
SECTION 1 - TOOLS
Ariel Optional Tools 1-1
Ariel Separately Purchased Tools 1-2
Ariel Separately Purchased Tool Kits 1-2
Recommended Tools 1-4
SECTION 2 - INSTRUMENTATION
Notes 2-3
Digital No-Flow Timer (DNFT) 2-3
DNFT Installation 2-4
Programmable DNFTs 2-6
DNFT Battery Replacement 2-7
Troubleshooting DNFT’s 2-8
Proximity Switch A-18255 2-9
Proximity Switch Installation 2-9
Troubleshooting Proximity Switches 2-10
Main Bearing Temperature Alarms and Shutdown 2-12
Thermocouples - J (Iron-Constantan) or K (Chromel-Alumel) 2-12
Resistance Temperature Devices (RTD’s) 2-12
Testing RTD’s and Thermocouples 2-12
RTD Testing 2-12
Thermocouple Testing 2-13
SECTION 3 - MAINTENANCE
Initial Maintenance 3-2
Daily Maintenance 3-3
Monthly Maintenance 3-4
Six-Month (4,000-Hour) Maintenance 3-5
One-Year (8,000-Hour) Maintenance 3-6
Two-Year (16,000-Hour) Maintenance 3-7
Three-Year (24,000-Hour) Maintenance 3-7
Four-Year (32,000-Hour) Maintenance 3-8
Six-Year (48,000-Hour) Maintenance 3-8
Frame Oil 3-8
REV: 07/19 i
Viscosity 3-8
Oil Pressure 3-10
Oil Temperature 3-10
Oil Maintenance 3-10
Dry Sump 3-11
Oil System Cleanliness 3-11
Frame Oil System Components 3-13
Oil Strainer 3-14
Oil Pump & Regulating Valve 3-14
Oil Cooler 3-14
Oil Temperature Control Valve 3-15
Oil Filter 3-15
Simplex Spin-on Filter Replacement 3-16
Simplex Filter Cartridge Replacement 3-17
Compact Duplex Filter Cartridge Replacement 3-18
Duplex Filter Cartridge Replacement 3-18
Transfer Valve Seal Replacement 3-19
Valve Disassembly 3-19
Valve Assembly 3-19
Compressor Pre-lube System 3-20
Flushing to Change to a PAG Lubricant 3-21
Recommended Flushing Oil 3-21
Flushing Procedure 3-21
Flushing the Force Feed Lubrication System 3-22
Common Oil Supply 3-22
Independent Oil Supply 3-23
Cylinder and Packing Lubrication 3-24
Force Feed Lubricator 3-24
Priming the Pump 3-25
Pump Adjustment 3-25
Auto-Relief Valve (ARV) 3-26
ARV Operation 3-26
Force Feed Lube Blow-Out Fittings, Rupture Disks, and Tubing 3-27
Distribution Blocks 3-28
Distribution Block Assembly 3-28
Divider Valve Bypass Pressure Test 3-29
Balance Valves 3-30
Adjustment of Balance Valves Fed by a Divider Block 3-31
Adjustment of Balance Valves Fed by Primary/Secondary Divider Blocks 3-32
Subsequent Compressor Start-Up 3-32
Force Feed System Design, Operating Parameters, and Conditions 3-33
Common Oil Supply 3-34
Independent Oil Supply 3-35
Force Feed Lubrication Conditions 3-35
Cycle Time 3-35
Under/Over Lube 3-36
ii REV: 07/19
Cylinder Lubrication Paper Test 3-36

Coolant System Requirements 3-37
SECTION 4 - PART REPLACEMENT
Positioning a Throw 4-2
Variable Volume Clearance Pocket (VVCP) 4-2
VVCP Removal 4-2
VVCP Disassembly 4-3
VVCP Reassembly 4-5
VVCP Installation 4-7
VVCP Adjustment 4-7
Compressor Valves - Removal and Installation 4-8
Required Tools and Materials 4-8
Valve Cap Removal 4-9
Valve Caps on Cast Iron Cylinders or High-Pressure Caps without Spring Energized Seals 4-9
Valve Cap with Spring Energized Seal 4-10
Valve Removal 4-10
Valve Installation 4-11
Valve Cap Installation 4-11
Valve Caps on Cast Iron Cylinders or High-Pressure Caps without Spring Energized Seals 4-12
Valve Caps with Spring Energized Seals 4-13
Gas Containment Fastener Torque Checks 4-13
Piston and Rod 4-14
Piston Rod Inspection 4-14
Piston and Rod Removal 4-14
Piston and Rod Manual Disassembly 4-15
Piston and Rod Manual Reassembly 4-16
Hydraulic Tensioner Tool 4-17
Hydraulic Tensioner Tool Setup 4-17
Piston & Rod Disassembly with Hydraulic Tensioner Tool 4-18
Piston & Rod Reassembly with Hydraulic Tensioner Tool 4-19
Piston and Rod Installation 4-20
Piston Rod Runout 4-22
Piston Rings 4-23
Seal-Joint Piston Rings 4-23
High-Pressure Face-Cut Piston Rings 4-23
Three-Piece Piston Rings 4-24
Five-Piece Piston Rings 4-24
Wear Bands 4-25
Piston Rod Packing 4-25
Piston Rod Packing Removal 4-25
Piston Rod Packing Reassembly 4-26
Reassembling and Testing Cooled Packing Cases 4-28
Reassembly 4-28
Testing 4-28
REV: 07/19 iii

Long Two-Compartment Intermediate Packing 4-29

Types of Piston Rod Packing Rings 4-29
“P” Pressure Breaker 4-29
“UP” Pressure Breaker 4-29
“P1U” Pressure Breaker 4-30
“BTR” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-30
“BTS” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-30
“BD” Double-Acting Seal Set 4-30
Double "WAT" Double-Acting Seal Set 4-31
“AL” Double-Acting Seal Set 4-31
“BT” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-31
“BTS” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-31
“BTUU” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-32
“CU” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-32
“CUU” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-32
“STU” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-33
“CR” Single-Acting Seal Set 4-33
“3RWS” Oil Wiper Set 4-33
Crossheads 4-34
Crosshead Removal 4-34
Crosshead Installation 4-36
Connecting Rods 4-38
Connecting Rod Removal 4-38
Connecting Rod Bearing Removal 4-39
Connecting Rod Bearing Installation 4-40
Connecting Rod Bushing Removal and Installation 4-41
Connecting Rod Installation 4-42
Connecting Rod Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement 4-43
Connecting Rod Thrust (Side) Clearance Measurement 4-44
Crankshafts 4-44
Oil Slinger Replacement 4-44
Main Bearing Removal 4-45
Main Bearing Installation 4-46
Crankshaft Removal 4-46
Crankshaft Installation 4-47
Main Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement 4-48
Crankshaft Thrust (End) Clearance Measurement 4-49
Chain Drive System 4-49
Chain and Sprocket Replacement 4-50
Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement (Eccentric Adjustment Caps) 4-51
Lube Oil Pump Sprocket Replacement 4-51
Force Feed Lubricator Chain Sprocket Replacement 4-52
Crankshaft Chain Sprocket Replacement 4-53
Chain Adjustment 4-53
Component Cleaning & Thread Lube for Non-Lube Compressor Cylinders 4-54
SECTION 5 - START UP
iv REV: 07/19
Warranty Notification - Installation List Data and Start Up Check Lists for
Reciprocating Compressors JG:A:M:P:N:Q:R:J:H:E:K:T:C:D:F, KBK:T, &
KB100 5-1
Warranty Notification - Installation List Data 5-1
SECTION 6 - COMPRESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING

Piston Rod Runout Correction 6-3
APPENDIX A - ARIEL FASTENERS AND TORQUES
Recommendations for Torque Accuracy A-2
APPENDIX B - CLEARANCES
Measuring Head End Clearance for Forged Steel Tandem Cylinders with
Concentric Valves B-10
APPENDIX C - FRAME SPECIFICATIONS
Opposed Throw - Reciprocating Weight Balancing C-5
APPENDIX D - COMPRESSOR CLEARANCE, OIL, & TEMPERATURE RECORD
APPENDIX E - BALANCE VALVE LOG
APPENDIX F - ER-34.1
Cleaning, Handling, and Assembly Lubricants for Non-Lubricated Com-
pressor Cylinders F-1
APPENDIX G - ER-26
Hold-down Bolting to Resist Shaking Forces and Couples in Reciprocating
Compressors G-1
Requirements G-1
APPENDIX H - ER-82
Soft Foot and Top Plane Flatness Checks for Proper Main Bearing Bore Align-
ment in Reciprocating Compressors H-1
Soft Foot Check H-1
Top Plane Flatness Check H-2
APPENDIX I - ER-89.10
Attachment of Wiring, Tubing, or Pipe Clamps to Ariel Compressor Cylinders I-1
REV: 07/19 v
General Safety for Reciprocating Compressors

CAUTION: Gas compressor packages are complicated and dangerous to those
unfamiliar with their operation. Only properly trained personnel should operate or
maintain this equipment. Before starting:
l Carefully study start-up and shut-down information for both package and
compressor. DO NOT attempt to start-up compressor without referring to the
Start-Up Checklist in the appropriate Ariel Maintenance and Repair Manual
and the Packager’s Operating Manual.
l Sufficiently purge the compressor of any explosive mixture before loading. A
gas/air mixture under pressure can explode and cause severe injury or death!
l Follow in detail all start-up requirements for the other package components.
When the symbol to the right appears on a compressor or control panel, consult
the appropriate Ariel Maintenance and Repair Manual for specific information
before proceeding. The Maintenance and Repair Manual applies to current design
and build; it may not apply to equipment built prior to the date on the front cover
and is subject to change without notice. For questions of compressor safety,
operation, maintenance, or repair, contact your packager or Ariel.
CAUTION: Severe personal injury and property damage can result if the
compressor is not completely vented before loosening bolts on flanges, heads,
valve caps, or packing. Consult the appropriate Ariel Maintenance and Repair
Manual before performing any maintenance.
CAUTION: Noise generated by reciprocating machinery may damage hearing.

See Packager information for specific recommendations. Wear hearing
protection during compressor operation.
CAUTION: Where applicable, compressor installation must conform to Zone 1

requirements. A Zone 1 environment requires installation of proper intrinsically
safe or equivalent protection to fulfill electrical requirements.
CAUTION: Hot gas temperatures (especially the cylinder discharge), 190°F (88°C)
oil, and high friction areas. Wear proper protection. Shut down unit and allow to
cool before maintaining these areas.
CAUTION: Suction or discharge valves installed in improper locations may result

in severe personal injury and property damage.
CAUTION: For JGT compressors with ET class cylinders, do not remove the pin
from the crosshead guide to compressor cylinder mounting face. It is there to
prevent installation of misapplied cylinders and avoid personal injury.
vi REV: 07/19
Throw and Data Plate Locations

When contacting Ariel with compressor questions, know throw locations and information on data plates
fastened to the machine. This data helps Ariel representatives answer quickly and accurately. Contact
Ariel for replacement if any data plates are missing.
1. VVCP Dimension Plate 6. VVCP Serial Number, MAWP, and 8. Compressor Data Plate
2. VVCP Data Plate Hydrotest Stamp 9. Force Feed Lubricator Pump Data
3. Mechanical Inspector Plate and Frame 7. Cylinder Serial Number, MAWP, and Plate
Serial Number Stamp Hydrotest Stamp 10. Force Feed Lubricator Data Plate
4. Rotation Direction Plate 11. Oil Filter Change Instruction Plate
5. Cylinder Data Plate
FIGURE i-1 Separable Guide Compressor Throw and Data Plate Locations - Typical
REV: 07/19 vii

Other Ariel Resources

Ariel Website
Visit www.arielcorp.com to view and print the latest documentation, such as:
l Customer Technical Bulletins (CTB’s) provide important information on changes, corrections, or
additions to Ariel products or services. Read these bulletins before operating or servicing equipment.
l Engineering References (ER’s) provide standard procedures and other useful information for
operation, maintenance, or repair of Ariel compressors or components. Read and follow these
procedures for long and trouble-free service from your Ariel compressor.
l Maintenance and Repair Manuals provide detailed maintenance and repair information on
specific Ariel compressor models.
l Packager Standards provide detailed requirements and recommendations on the installation of an
Ariel compressor.
l Application Manual provides detailed information on the use of Ariel compressors in different
applications.
Ariel Technical and Service Schools

Ariel schedules several in-plant schools each year, which include classroom and hands-on training.
Ariel also sends representatives to provide customized training on location. Contact Ariel for details.
Ariel Contact Information

Contact Telephone Fax E-Mail
Ariel Response Center 888-397-7766 740-397-1060 [email protected]

(toll free USA & Canada) or
Spare Parts 740-397-3602 (International) 740-393-5054 [email protected]
Order Entry 740-397-3856 --
Ariel World HQ 740-397-0311 740-397-3856 [email protected]
Technical Services [email protected]
Website: www.arielcorp.com
Ariel Response Center Technicians or Switchboard Operators answer telephones during Ariel
business hours, Eastern Time - USA or after hours by voice mail. Contact an authorized distributor to
purchase Ariel parts. Always provide Ariel equipment serial number(s) to order spare parts. The after-
hours Telephone Emergency System works as follows:
1. Follow automated instructions to Technical Services Emergency Assistance or Spare Parts
Emergency Service. Calls are answered by voice mail.
2. Leave a message: caller name and telephone number, serial number of equipment in question
(frame, cylinder, unloader), and a brief description of the emergency.
3. Your voice mail routes to an on-call representative who responds as soon as possible.
viii REV: 07/19

Section 1 - Tools
Ariel Optional Tools
Ariel offers an optional tool kit with every compressor. For JGH:E:K:T compressors, it contains the tools
shown below, which are specifically designed for use on Ariel units. Clean all tools before use and verify
full tool engagement with the part being removed or installed. If the Tool Kit is missing or if a single tool
is missing, worn, or broken, call your distributor. Do not use worn or broken tools, or substitutes for Ariel
furnished tools. See Parts List for individual tool part numbers.
1. Tool Box 10. Piston Entering Sleeve 17. Piston Rod Entering Sleeve
2. Peg Wrench (included only for compressors 18. 5/8 x 3/4 UNF Valve Tool
3. Main Bearing Removal Tool with forged steel, tail-rod 19. 5/16 x 1/2 UNF Valve Tool
4. 9/16 Socket Piston Turning cylinders with step to bore) 20. 1/4 x 3/8 UNF Valve Tool
Tool (included only for 11. Crosshead Pin Alignment Tool 21. 3/4 x 1" UNC Valve Tool (for
compressors with small 12. Forged 5/8 - 11 UNC Eyebolts CT valves)
cylinders) (2 provided) 22. 3/4 Allen Wrench (1 provided)
5. 4-Inch Open End Wrench 13. Forged 1/2 - 13 UNC Eyebolts 23. 1/2 Allen Wrench (2 provided)
(included only for compressors (2 provided)
24. 3/8 Allen Wrench (1 provided)
with hex crosshead balance 14. Forged 3/8 - 16 UNC Eyebolts
nuts) (6 provided)
6. Piston Nut Spanner 15. Cylinder Bolt Torque Adapter
27. Crosshead Installation Tool
7. Ariel Bore & Thread Gauge 16. Valve Removal Tool (included
only for compressors with 28. ER-63 Fastener Torque Chart
8. Connecting Rod Bolt 90° Turn
forged steel cylinders - tool (not shown)
Indicator Tool
9. Connecting Rod Cap Removal size and style varies with
Tool cylinder size and valve center
connection)
FIGURE 1-1 Optional Furnished Tools for JGH:E:K:T Compressors
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Section 1 - Tools
Ariel Separately Purchased Tools
1. Hand Pump for hydraulic crosshead balance nut torquing tool 4. Piston Rod Clamping Fixture
and piston rod tensioning tool (includes hand pump, hose, 5. Force Feed Lubricator Bearing Housing
coupler, and gauge) Wrench
2. Hydraulic Crosshead Balance Nut Torquing Tool (includes 6. Force Feed Lubrication Hand Purge
tool and ram) Pump
3. Hydraulic Piston Rod Tensioning Tool
FIGURE 1-2 Ariel Separately Purchased Tools for JGH:E:K:T Compressors
Ariel Separately Purchased Tool Kits

1. Ariel SAE Hand Measurement Tool Kit
a. 0.0005 in. needle type dial indicator
b. 0.001 in. 1-inch travel dial indicator
c. Magnet base for dial indicator
d. 3/8” drive calibrated torque wrench, 40 to 200 in x lbs
e. 3/8” drive calibrated torque wrench, 10 to 100 ft x lbs
f. 1/2” drive calibrated torque wrench, 50 to 250 ft x lbs
g. 3/4” drive calibrated torque wrench, 120 to 600 ft x lbs
h. 1” drive calibrated torque wrench, 200 to 1000 ft x lbs
2. Ariel SAE Hand Tool Kit
a. 15-piece combination open/box end wrench set, 5/16” to 1-1/4”
b. 8-piece slot and Phillips screwdriver set
Page 1-2 of 4 REV: 07/19

Section 1 - Tools For models JGH:E:K:T
c. 3/8" square drive wrench set, including:
l 12-piece, 12-point socket set, 5/16” to 1” l Ball type universal joint

l 7” ratchet l 3/8” to 1/2" drive adapter
l Speed handle l 1/4” hex key socket
l Extensions, 1-1/2”, 3”, 6”, and 12” l 8-1/2” breaker bar
d. 1/2" square drive wrench set, including:
l 14-piece, 12-point socket set, 7/16” to 1- l 10-1/4” ratchet

1/4” with clip rail
l Speed handle
l Extensions, 1-1/2”, 5”, and 10"
l Ball type universal joint
l Drive adapters: 1/2” to 3/8" and 1/2” to 3/4"
l 18” breaker bar
l 1-1/4” open end crow’s foot adapter
l 1/2” and 5/8” hex key sockets
e. 3/4" square drive wrench set, including:
l 18-piece, 12-point socket set, 3/4” to 2” l 24” ratchet

l Extensions, 3-1/2”, 8”, and 16” l 22” breaker bar
l Drive adapters: 3/4” to 1/2", 3/4” to 1", and
1” to 3/4"
f. 1" square drive wrench set, including:
l 14-piece, 12-point socket set, 1-7/16” through 2-5/8”
l 30” ratchet
l Extensions: 8” and 17”
l 22” sliding T
g. Adjustable wrenches: 12" and 18"
h. Dead blow semi-soft faced hammers: 3 lb. and 6 lb
i. 3/4” x 36” pry bar
j. 12” long feeler gauge set
k. 12” machinist scale with 0.01 in. increments
l. 13-piece Allen wrench set, 0.050 in. - 3/8”
REV: 07/19 Page 1-3 of 4

For models JGH:E:K:T Section 1 - Tools
Recommended Tools
Ariel compressor maintenance and repair normally requires only Ariel furnished tools and separately
purchased tools and tool kits. However, Ariel also recommends purchasing the additional tools below.
Contact Ariel for questions about tools for Ariel units.
1. 12-point box end torque adapter extension wrench set, including 1-1/2 and 2-1/4 inch sizes
2. Tape measure
3. Flashlight
4. Small mirror on a flexible extension rod
5. Small magnet on a flexible extension rod
6. Electric and/or pneumatic drill
7. Twist drill set
8. Torque multiplier
Page 1-4 of 4 REV: 07/19

Section 2 - Instrumentation
Several optional instruments can aid in the operation of an Ariel compressor. Through the data they
provide, some instruments can help decrease maintenance costs and downtime, and help diagnose
lubrication and other types of problems. The use of “alarm” instead of “shutdown” for any minimum
instrumentation requirement may result in equipment damage.
NOTE: Ariel recommends the use of shipboard or armored cabling as opposed to wiring in
conduit to minimize nuisance shutdowns due to wire chafing and shorts. Cable in cable
trays also facilitates maintenance access.
CAUTION: DO NOT drill holes in cylinders or other pressure containing components for
any purpose. Epoxy-mounted clamps (to bare metal) for wiring and tubing are a suitable
alternative. See Appendix I.
CAUTION: Any arc welding on the skid and/or associated equipment and piping can
permanently damage solid-state electronic equipment. Welding can cause immediate
failure or reduce electronic equipment life and void the warranty. To protect electronic
equipment prior to any arc welding (including repair welding), disconnect all electrical
connections including ground, and remove batteries, or completely remove the
electronic equipment from the compressor.
It is good practice to attach the welding ground clamp as close as possible to the area
where the welding will occur and to use the lowest practical welder output setting.
Welding must not cause a current flow across any compressor bearing surface,
including but not limited to crankshaft and crosshead bearing surfaces.
TABLE 2-1 Required Instrumentation Summary
INSTRUMENT SUPPLIER SETTING/REQUIREMENT
Frame Oil System (see “Frame Oil System Components” on page 3-13)
Oil Pressure Packager
l Start Permissive with Pre-lube Pump 30 psig (2.1 barg) for 2 minutes
l Run Permissive 45 psig (3.1 barg) within 10 seconds of start
l Alarm 50 psig (3.4 barg)
l Shutdown 45 psig (3.1 barg)
Oil Filter Differential Ariel Change at 10 psi (0.7 bar) for JGK:T/2/4 or 15 psi (1.0 bar) for
JGK:T/6 or 4000 hours, whichever occurs first.
Oil Temperature Packager
l Minimum, to start up or to load See “Viscosity” on page 3-8 for max. oil viscosity based on
frame size.
l Minimum, operating 150°F (66°C)
l Maximum, shutdown 190°F (88°C)
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Section 2 - Instrumentation
INSTRUMENT SUPPLIER SETTING/REQUIREMENT
Crankcase Level Packager 1/2 to 2/3 sight glass level
l Low Level Shutdown 1/4 sight glass level
Main Bearing Temp. Ariel Recommended, but optional.
Packing Case Temp. Ariel Optional
l Alarm +20°F (11°C) above normal
l Shutdown +30°F (17°C) above normal
Packing Case Vent Packager Optional
l Vent Flow Alarm 2 - 4 scfm (per throw)
l Vent Flow Shutdown > 4 scfm (per throw)
Scrubber Liquid Level Packager
l High Liquid Level Control
l High Liquid Level Shutdown
Gas Conditions Packager
l Inlet Temperature Indicator, each cylinder
l Inlet Pressure Indicator, each stage
l Discharge Pressure Indicator, each stage
l Discharge Temperature Indicator, each cylinder, each nozzle on dual nozzle cylinders
l High Discharge Temperature 10% above normala

Shutdown, each cylinder (Not to exceed the maximum temperatures below)
l Lubricated Cylinders 350°F (177°C)
l Non-Lube/PRC Cylinders 325°F (163°C)
l Hydrogen Rich > 50% < 0.41 Specific 300°F (149°C)

Gravity
l Air Not to exceed autoignition temperature of cylinder lubricant at

discharge pressure
l Relief Valve Setting above normal Up to 150: 15 to 2500: to 3500: to 5000: Over 5000:
operating pressure (not to exceed MAWP) psig (1.0 barg) 10% 8% 6% As agreed
See ER-56.04.
Cyl. Rod Load Protection Packager
High Vibration Shutdown Packager As close to normal level as practical. See "Vibration
Protection" in ER-56.07.
Over Speed Packager 10% over rated speed for shutdown
a. Example: Normal Discharge Temp. = 270°F; Shutdown Setting = 270 x 1.1 = 297°F.
Page 2-2 of 13 REV: 07/19

Section 2 - Instrumentation For models JGH:E:K:T
Notes
1. Install the compressor frame low lube oil pressure shutdown set to stop the unit if oil pressure
downstream of the filter falls below 45 psig (3.1 barg). Compressor operation for only a few seconds
without oil pressure causes major damage. Normal oil pressure is about 60 psig (4.1 barg) at full
rated speed and normal operating temperature. The low oil pressure shutdown must activate after
oil pressure exceeds 45 psig (3.1 barg) at start-up. Ariel provides a 1/4 inch tubing fitting to connect
the low lube oil pressure shutdown and ties a tag to this connection before each compressor ships.
Do not operate the compressor for prolonged periods at less than 50 psig (3.4 barg) oil pressure.
2. Automated pre-lube systems require a start permissive to sense minimum required pressure/time at
oil gallery inlet. See “Compressor Pre-lube System” on page 3-20. Unit must shut down if the
system fails to achieve 45 psig (3.1 barg) oil pressure within 10 seconds after crankshaft starts to
turn.
3. Mount overhead lube oil supply tanks high enough to provide oil flow to the level control at all
ambient temperatures.
4. On multi-nozzle cylinders, Ariel strongly recommends a temperature device in both discharge
nozzles.
5. Install the high lube oil inlet temperature shutdown at the filter inlet connection.
6. At a minimum, install one vibration shutdown for two and four throw frames and two for six throw
frames. Mount vibration devices near the top of the frame with the sensitive axis parallel to the piston
rod axis.
7. Install all safety shutdowns, controls, instrumentation, ignition systems, electrical devices, and high
temperature piping (gas discharge and engine exhaust) in accordance with good engineering
practice and applicable codes for the area classification at the end user location. Ensure
compatibility of all systems for area classification.
8. If packing vent temperature is monitored, alarm and shutdown set points should be confirmed
through vent flow rates.
Digital No-Flow Timer (DNFT)

CAUTION: See arc welding caution.
A DNFT is a totally enclosed electronic device, combining the latest technology in microprocessor and
transistor components to detect slow-flow and no-flow of divider block lubrication systems. The DNFT
uses an oscillating crystal to accurately monitor the lubrication system cycle time to enable precision
timed shutdown capability. The magnet assembly and control housing mount directly to a divider valve.
Lubricant flow through a divider valve assembly forces the piston to cycle back and forth causing a
lateral movement of the DNFT magnet linked to the piston. The DNFT microprocessor monitors piston
movement and resets the timer, lights the light emitting diode (LED), and allows the unit to continue
operation, indicating one complete cycle of the lubrication system. If the microprocessor fails to receive
this cycle within a predetermined time, a shutdown occurs. The DNFT automatically resets the alarm
circuit when normal divider valve operation resumes.
DNFTs utilize an LED to indicate each cycle of the divider valve, which allows easy adjustment and
monitoring of lubrication rates. Programmable models display total pints, cycle time of divider valve,
total cycles of divider valve, or pints per day pump flow rate on a liquid crystal display and operators can
adjust alarm time from 20 to 255 seconds.
REV: 07/19 Page 2-3 of 13

DNFT Installation
1. Loosen the Allen set screws on the DNFT and remove
magnet housing. Do not remove magnet, spring, or
spacer from magnet housing.
2. Remove piston enclosure plug from end of desired
divider valve. The DNFT installs on any of the divider
valves of the divider block. The DNFT requires the
correct magnet assembly to match the divider valve
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not install a DNFT on Lincoln divider
valves with cycle indicator pins.
3. If applicable, verify O-ring or metal gasket is in place on
magnet housing. Thread magnet housing into end of
divider valve. Torque to 15 lbs x ft (20 N•m) maximum.
4. Slide DNFT all the way onto hex of magnet housing.
Torque Allen set screws on hex of magnet housing to 25
FIGURE 2-1 Typical DNFT Magnet
lbs x inch, (2.8 N•m) maximum. Assemblies
5. The LED on the DNFT indicates each divider
valve cycle to allow lubricator pump adjustment
for Ariel recommended cycle time and oil
consumption. If the LED fails to blink during
compressor operation or by manually pumping
oil into the divider valve, then the DNFT requires
adjustment.
6. The divider valve must cycle during DNFT
adjustment. To cycle it, either run the
compressor or manually pump oil through the
distribution block with a purge pump.
7. To adjust, slide DNFT all the way onto hex of
magnet housing. Tighten Allen set screws to 25 1. Divider Valve Piston 6. Control Housing
lbs x inch (2.8 N•m) maximum. A blinking LED 2. Magnet 7. Wire Leads
indicates correct adjustment. If the LED fails to
blink with divider valve cycling, slide DNFT back 3. Magnet Housing 8. O-Ring
on the hex of the magnet housing in 1/16" 4. Set Screws (2) 9. Divider Valve
increments until it does.
5. LED 10. Piston Enclosure Plug
8. Make all conduit and connections appropriate
FIGURE 2-2 Typical DNFT Installation
for area classification. Insulate unused wires
from ground, other wires, and the case. Support
conduit and fittings to avoid bending the magnet housing.
9. After DNFT installation and before compressor start-up, purge all air from divider block lubrication
system with a purge pump.
NOTE: When installing multiple DNFTs, wire each to a separate alarm circuit of the control
panel, annunciator, or PLC to simplify lubrication system and DNFT troubleshooting. Always
secure green ground wire to "earth ground" in the control panel. Do not ground to electrical
conduit or skid. Improper grounding can result in unreliable monitor operation.
Page 2-4 of 13 REV: 07/19

FIGURE 2-3 A-10754 Programmable DNFT Wiring Connections for Unit in

Operation
FIGURE 2-4 A-10753 and A-10772 DNFT Wiring Connections for Unit in Operation
FIGURE 2-5 A-20513 24 VDC Programmable DNFT Wiring Connections for Unit in
Operation
FIGURE 2-6 A-20514 24 VDC DNFT Wiring Connections for Unit in Operation
REV: 07/19 Page 2-5 of 13

Programmable DNFTs
Programmable DNFTs come with a small liquid
crystal display (LCD) screen to display total
divider valve cycles (Mode 1), cycle time of divider
valve in seconds (Mode 2), total pints of oil used
(Mode 3), or pump flow rate in pints per day
(Mode 4). Operators can also adjust alarm time in
Mode 1.
CAUTION: Program DNFT before

installing it on a divider valve. DO NOT
insert programming magnet into 1/8” 1. Magnet 7. 1/8" recessed opening
2. Magnet Housing for programming
recessed opening while the compressor
3. Allen Set Screws magnet
is operating; it causes the DNFT to shut
4. LED 8. Wire Leads
down the compressor. Programming
modes cannot be changed while the 5. Control Housing 9. Programming Magnet
compressor is operating. To program a 6. LCD
DNFT, first remove it from the divider FIGURE 2-7 Typical Programmable DNFT
valve.
To program:
1. Insert the programming magnet into the 1/8" recessed opening on the face of the DNFT. The current
programming mode (1, 2, 3, or 4) immediately displays on the LCD followed by "0" 2 seconds later.
"0" indicates the current mode is ready for programming.
2. If the desired programming mode does not display, remove and re-insert the programming magnet
into the recessed opening until it does. Leave the programming magnet in the recessed opening
when the desired programming mode displays.
3. Select one of the programming modes below:
a. Mode 1 - LCD displays total divider valve cycles; program alarm time.
l To set alarm time, press and release the spring-loaded magnet assembly until the desired
alarm time in seconds displays on the LCD. Set alarm time from a minimum of 20 seconds to a
maximum of 255 seconds. If not set, device defaults to 120 seconds.
l Remove programming magnet. DNFT displays total divider valve cycles if left in this mode and
alarm time is now set.
b. Mode 2 - LCD displays cycle time of divider valve in seconds.
l Remove programming magnet when Mode 2 displays. LCD counts each divider valve cycle in
seconds, counting up from zero until the divider valve completes one full cycle. When divider
valve completes one full cycle, the LCD resets to zero and repeats the count until another
cycle is completed. The LED blinks in all modes to indicate each divider valve cycle. This blink
enables the operator to set pump flow rate.
Page 2-6 of 13 REV: 07/19

c. Mode 3 - LCD displays total pints used; program divider valve total.
l To set divider valve total, add the sizes of the divider valve sections on which the DNFT will be
installed. Example: 24 + 24 + 24 = 72.
l Press and release the spring-loaded magnet until the divider valve total displays on the LCD.
Maximum value: 120. If not set, device defaults to zero and prevents Mode 4 flow rate display.
l Remove programming magnet. The DNFT displays total pints on the LCD if left in this mode.
d. Mode 4 - LCD displays pump flow rate in pints per day.
l Remove programming magnet with Mode 4 displays. LCD displays pump flow rate in pints per
day based upon the divider valve total set in Mode 3. Mode 4 requires a minimum 4 second cycle
time.
The DNFT stores all programmed information until the operator inserts the programming magnet into
the recessed opening, selects Mode 1 or Mode 3, and presses the spring loaded magnet assembly.
This action resets the unit to zero and allows entry of a new value.
NOTE: Power interruption to the DNFT requires reprogramming Mode 1 and Mode 3.
DNFT Battery Replacement

The DNFT operates on a field-replaceable lithium
battery that should last six to ten years. If battery
voltage drops below 2.5 VDC, the DNFT shuts
down and the compressor cannot be restarted
until the battery is replaced.
CAUTION: Do not open a DNFT in an

explosive gas atmosphere.
1. Shut down compressor.

2. Disconnect DNFT wiring 1. Magnet Housing 7. 1/2" Pipe Plug
2. Magnet 8. #22 AWG 18" (0.46 m)
3. Use 1/8 inch Allen wrench to loosen Allen set 3. O-Ring Leads
screws and remove control housing to a safe 4. Control Housing 9. Spring
atmosphere. 5. Polarized Connector 10. Spacer
4. Use 3/8 inch ratchet wrench to remove pipe 6. Field Replaceable 11. Allen Set Screws
plug. Battery
FIGURE 2-8 Typical Digital No-Flow Timer Switch
5. Remove battery and disconnect from (DNFT)
polarized connector.
6. Test battery. The voltage should read 3.6
VDC.
7. Connect new battery to polarized connector.
8. Insert new battery and reinstall pipe plug. Apply teflon tape to plug threads and torque to 25 ft x lb
(34 N•m).
REV: 07/19 Page 2-7 of 13

9. Place DNFT control housing on the magnet housing in its original position and tighten set screws.
Reattach wiring and conduit.
10. Programmable DNFTs require reprogramming of the alarm time (Mode 1) and divider valve total
(Mode 3) after a power interruption. See programming section of this document.
11. To verify DNFT operation, pre-lube the system and check for LED blink.
Troubleshooting DNFT’s
NOTE: When installing multiple DNFTs, wire each to a separate alarm circuit of the control
panel, annunciator, or PLC to simplify lubrication system and DNFT troubleshooting. See
ER-105.3.1 for DNFT bench test procedures.
Possible
Problem Solution
Cause
LED does not Improperly Loosen set screws, slide DNFT all the way onto hex of magnet housing and
blink and adjusted torque to 25 lbs x inch (2.8 N•m) max. (Do not over tighten). Either pump
control panel DNFT. clean oil through lubrication system with a purge pump or run the compressor
indicates lube to cycle the divider valve. If necessary, slide DNFT back in 1/16“ increments
no-flow. (see until LED blinks with each divider valve cycle.
also Erratic
Shutdown) Broken spring Loosen set screws, remove DNFT from magnet housing. Remove magnet
or magnet in housing from divider valve. Remove magnet, spring, and spacer and check
magnet for damage. Replace damaged components. Re-install magnet housing on
housing. divider valve and DNFT on magnet housing. If necessary, adjust DNFT,
check for LED blink. Purge air from system with purge pump.
Low battery Remove battery from DNFT and test it. Replace battery with a factory
voltage. recommended replacement lithium battery if voltage is below 2.5 VDC.
Bent magnet Loosen set screws, remove DNFT from magnet housing. Check for
housing. damaged or bent magnet housing. Remove magnet assembly from divider
valve. Replace magnet housing, magnet, spring, and spacer. Re-install new
magnet housing on divider valve and DNFT on magnet housing. If
necessary, adjust DNFT, check for LED blink. Purge air from system with
purge pump.
ARV Wrong Loosen set screws and remove DNFT from magnet housing. Check for
bypasses or magnet correct magnet housing for divider valve manufacturer. Remove and replace
rupture disk housing with correct magnet housing. Re-install DNFT on new magnet housing. If
bursts and installed on necessary adjust DNFT, check for LED blink. Purge air from system with
divider valve divider valve. purge pump.
seizes after
DNFT Air or Check system pressure to verify oil flows to divider valves. If needed, install
installation. debris in pressure gauge to monitor lubrication system operation:
divider valve l Loosen outlet plugs in front of valve blocks. Purge lubrication system with
assembly. a purge pump until clean, clear, air-free oil flows from plugs.
l Loosen, but do not remove, each piston enclosure plug individually to
purge air from behind piston. Tighten all divider valve plugs. Adjust
proximity switch.
To ensure proper lube system operation, all tubing and components
MUST be filled with oil and free of air before start-up.
Page 2-8 of 13 REV: 07/19

Possible
Problem Solution
Cause
Erratic Faulty wiring A-10753 l Normally Open - Attach ohmmeter to red wires. Should read
shutdown or from DNFT to A-10772 10MΩ in operation and less than 10Ω in alarm.
LED blink. control panel A-20513 l Normally Closed - Attach ohmmeter to orange wires. Should
or air in read less than 10Ω in operation and open loop in alarm.
system (see
above for air A-10754 l Normally Open - Attach ohmmeter to orange wires; insulate
in system). A-20514 violet wires from each other. Should read 10Ω or less in alarm.
l Normally Closed - Attach ohmmeter to orange wires. Short
violet wires together. Should read open loop in alarm.
Faulty lube Check system pressure to verify oil flows to pump and divider valves. If
pump. needed, install pressure gauge to monitor lubrication system operation.
Check gauge to verify pump builds sufficient pressure to inject oil into
cylinder. Do not remove tubing from check valve and pump oil to atmosphere
to check oil flow into cylinder. Replace pump.
Overtightened Step-torque divider valves to 75 lb x in (8.5 N•m) to the backplate.

divider valves
Proximity Switch A-18255

CAUTION: See arc welding caution.
A proximity switch installs into a divider valve in place of a piston end plug and can be used to actuate
any device. It consists of a reed switch and a magnet. When installed, the magnet rests against the
divider valve piston and parallel to the reed switch. With every divider valve cycle, the piston moves the
magnet, which opens and closes the reed switch contacts.
The time for the proximity switch to repeat a contact transition (ex. from open to closed) is known as the
cycle time of the divider valve assembly. The proximity switch must work with a PLC or some other
counter/timer device to produce a shutdown. See "Instrumentation" in the Ariel Packager Standards for
interpretation of proximity switch pulse output.
Proximity Switch Installation

1. Loosen the Allen set screws on the proximity switch
housing and remove magnet housing. Do not remove
magnet, spring, or spacer from magnet housing.
2. Remove piston enclosure plug from end of desired
divider valve. The proximity switch installs on any of the
divider valves of the divider block. The proximity switch
requires the correct magnet assembly to match the
divider valve manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not install a proximity switch on Lincoln
divider valves with cycle indicator pins.
3. If applicable, verify O-ring or metal gasket is in place on
magnet housing. Thread magnet housing into end of
divider valve. Torque to 15 lbs x ft maximum.
FIGURE 2-9 Typical Magnet Assemblies
REV: 07/19 Page 2-9 of 13

4. Slide proximity switch all the way onto hex of magnet housing. Torque Allen set screws on hex of
magnet housing to 25 lbs x inch, maximum.
5. Connect an ohm meter across the two yellow
switch leads exiting the proximity switch
housing.
6. The divider valve must cycle during proximity
switch adjustment. To cycle it, either run the
compressor or manually pump oil through the
distribution block with a purge pump.
7. To adjust, slide proximity switch all the way onto
hex of magnet housing. Tighten Allen set
screws to 25 lbs x inch maximum. The ohm
meter showing the switch changing state as the
divider valve cycles indicates correct
1. Divider Valve Piston 7. Switch Housing
adjustment. If the switch state fails to change,
slide proximity switch back on the hex of the 2. Magnet 8. Wire Leads (yellow)
magnet housing in 1/16" increments until it does. 3. Magnet Housing 9. Ground Wire (green)
8. Make all conduit and connections appropriate 4. Allen Set Screw (2) 10. O-Ring
for area classification. Support conduit and
fittings to avoid bending the magnet housing. 5. Spacer 11. Divider Valve
9. After proximity switch installation and before 6. Spring 12. Piston End Plug
compressor start-up, purge all air from divider FIGURE 2-10 Typ. Proximity Switch Installation
block lubrication system with a purge pump.
NOTE: When installing multiple proximity switches, wire each to a separate alarm circuit of
the control panel, annunciator, or PLC to simplify lubrication system and proximity switch
troubleshooting. Always secure green ground wire to "earth ground" in the control panel.
Do not ground to electrical conduit. Improper grounding can result in unreliable monitor
operation.
FIGURE 2-11 A-18255 Proximity Switch Wiring Connections for Unit in Operation
Troubleshooting Proximity Switches

NOTE: When installing multiple proximity switches, wire each to a separate circuit in the
control panel, annunciator, or PLC to simplify lubrication system and proximity switch
troubleshooting.
Page 2-10 of 13 REV: 07/19

Problem Possible Cause Solution
Switch does Improperly adjusted Loosen set screws, slide proximity switch all the way onto hex of
not cycle and proximity switch. magnet housing and torque to 25 lbs x inch max. (Do not over
control panel tighten). Either pump clean oil through lubrication system with a purge
indicates lube pump or run the compressor to cycle the divider valve. If necessary,
no-flow. (see slide proximity switch back in 1/16“ increments until the switch
also Erratic opens/closes with each divider valve cycle.
Operation)
Broken spring or Loosen set screws, remove proximity switch from magnet housing.
magnet in magnet Remove magnet housing from divider valve. Remove magnet, spring,
housing. and spacer and check for damage. Replace damaged components.
Re-install magnet housing on divider valve and proximity switch on
magnet housing. If necessary, adjust proximity switch and test switch
functionality. Purge air from system with purge pump.
Bent magnet Loosen set screws, remove proximity switch from magnet housing.
housing. Check for damaged or bent magnet housing. Remove magnet
assembly from divider valve. Replace magnet housing, magnet,
spring, and spacer. Re-install new magnet housing on divider valve
and proximity switch on magnet housing. If necessary, adjust
proximity switch and test switch functionality. Purge air from system
with purge pump.
ARV Wrong magnet Loosen set screws and remove proximity switch from magnet housing.
bypasses or housing installed on Check for correct magnet housing for divider valve manufacturer.
rupture disk divider valve. Remove and replace with correct magnet housing. Re-install proximity
bursts and switch on new magnet housing. If necessary adjust proximity switch
divider valve and test switch functionality. Purge air from system with purge pump.
seizes after
proximity Air or debris in Check system pressure to verify oil flows to divider valves. If needed,
switch divider valve install pressure gauge to monitor lubrication system operation:
assembly. l Loosen outlet plugs in front of valve blocks. Purge lubrication system
installation.
with a purge pump until clean, clear, air-free oil flows from plugs.
l Loosen, but do not remove, each piston enclosure plug individually to
purge air from behind piston. Tighten all divider valve plugs. Adjust
proximity switch.
To ensure proper lube system operation, all tubing and
components MUST be filled with oil and free of air before start-
up.
Erratic Faulty wiring from Check electrical wiring and connections for damage or poor contact.
Operation. proximity switch to See FIGURE 2-11.
control panel or air
in system (see
above for air in
system).
Faulty lube pump. Check system pressure to verify oil flows to pump and divider valves.
If needed, install pressure gauge to monitor lubrication system
operation. Check gauge to verify pump builds sufficient pressure to
inject oil into cylinder. Do not remove tubing from check valve and
pump oil to atmosphere to check oil flow into cylinder. Replace pump.
REV: 07/19 Page 2-11 of 13

Main Bearing Temperature Alarms and Shutdown

Main bearing thermocouples or RTD temperature sensors are optional for JGH:E:K:T frames.
Thermocouples - J (Iron-Constantan) or K (Chromel-Alumel)

A thermocouple is two dissimilar conductors joined together at one end to form a sensor that produces a
thermoelectric voltage as an accurate function of temperature. Appropriate controls interpret the
thermocouple voltage as temperature.
Resistance Temperature Devices (RTD’s)

An RTD is a sensor that produces electrical resistance as an accurate
function of temperature. Appropriate controls interpret the electrical
resistance as temperature. A typical measurement technique sends a
small constant current through the sensor and measures voltage
across the sensor with a digital voltmeter to indicate resistance by a
computer and wave-fitting equations.
For main or thrust bearing temperature sensing, Ariel supplies dual
element, six-wire, 100 Ohm (at 0°C) RTD’s. Dual element RTD’s
allow rewiring instead of sensor replacement if an element fails.
Insulate unused wire ends from each other and conduit ground.
To simplify wiring, RTD's come with two green wires and one black for
one element, and two red wires and one white for the other. See
FIGURE 2-12.
FIGURE 2-12 Typical Dual
A Zone 1 environment may require the installation of proper, Element RTD Wiring Diagram
intrinsically safe or equivalent protection to fulfill electrical
requirements.
Testing RTD’s and Thermocouples

Ariel uses resistive temperature devices (RTD) or thermocouples (TC) to monitor main bearing and
packing temperatures. An RTD has either three or six wires; a TC has two.
RTD Testing
Ariel uses two types of RTD: single and
dual element. Single element consists
of one white wire and two red wires.
Dual element consists of one element
of one white wire and two red wires,
and another of one black wire and two
green wires.
1. Set multimeter to the 100 Ohms
resistance scale.
FIGURE 2-13 Typical RTD/Thermocouple
Page 2-12 of 13 REV: 07/19

2. Touch one multimeter lead to the white element wire, and the other lead to one of the red element
wires. The multimeter should read between 100 Ohms (RTD at 32°F) to 112 Ohms (RTD at 90°F).
Test the other red wire with the white wire. Resistance should be similar for both red wires.
Resistance outside the specified range indicates a damaged or broken element.
3. For dual element RTD’s, perform step 2 with the black and two green wires.
4. Set the multimeter to check for continuity ( ).
5. Isolate all element wires from the tube bend and transition piece. Check for continuity between each
wire and these components. The multimeter displays “1.” to indicate the circuit is not continuous. It
displays a value between .001 and .010 and beeps to indicate a continuous circuit. Only the white
wire tested with either red wire and (for dual element RTD’s) the black wire tested with either green
wire should yield a continuous circuit. A continuous circuit between any element wire and any
component indicates a damaged RTD that needs replaced.
Thermocouple Testing
Ariel uses two types of TC: Type J (-328 to 2192°F), which has a red and a white wire, and Type K (-
328 to 2501°F), which has a red and a yellow wire. TC’s generate a very low voltage that is difficult to
measure with a multimeter. A digital thermometer attached to the TC measures the voltage and
converts it to a temperature reading based on the thermocouple type.
1. Turn ON the digital thermometer.
2. Select the thermometer test lead with colored alligator clips that match the element wire colors of the
TC being tested.
3. Plug the test lead into the top of the thermometer. Take care to align the blades to the appropriate
hole.
4. Press the TYPE button until “J” or “K” appears on the screen as appropriate. If “°C” displays, press
the C/F button to change the display to “°F”.
5. Attach the red alligator clip to the red element wire and the other alligator clip to the remaining
element wire (either white or yellow). If the connections are reversed, the thermometer displays
inaccurate temperature (about 2°F less at room temperature and 135°F less at 150°F). The
temperature displayed should be about room temperature before TC installation. If displayed
temperature is not room temperature or seems odd, verify test setup.
6. Detach alligator clips from TC.
7. Set the multimeter to check for continuity ( ).
8. Isolate both element wires from the tube bend and transition piece. Check for continuity between
each wire and these components. The multimeter displays “1.” to indicate the circuit is not
continuous. It displays a value between .001 and .010 and beeps to indicate a continuous circuit.
Only the two TC element wires should yield a continuous circuit. A continuous circuit between an
element wire and any component indicates a damaged TC that needs replaced.
REV: 07/19 Page 2-13 of 13

Section 3 - Maintenance
Ariel compressors, like all industrial equipment, require maintenance. The severity of compressor
service directly influences the frequency and amount of maintenance needed. Below are
recommended intervals for inspections and replacements to help determine appropriate intervals for a
given compressor application. Careful documentation of inspection results is critical to establish
whether recommended intervals are adequate or require more or less frequency.
Continuous Duty: The compressor operates continuously, 24 hours a day, shutting down only for
short durations, usually for maintenance and unexpected shut-downs.
Short-Term Intermittent Duty: The compressor operates for short durations, starting and stopping
perhaps several times per day, such as in many CNG filling station applications that require operation
based on consumer demand.
Long-Term Intermittent Duty: The compressor operates continuously for extended durations, with
extended shut-down periods, such as in some storage/withdrawal applications and fuel gas booster
applications.
Many factors affect bearing life including number of starts, starting conditions, and run hours. Consider
site-specific conditions when adjusting maintenance intervals.
NOTE: For intermittent duty service, see ER-8.2.2.
As part of your maintenance program, Ariel recommends:
l Consistent adherence to safety policies, procedures, and equipment warning labels.
l Daily operational checks.
l Routine trending and review of operational parameters.
l Routine oil analysis and trending.
l Detailed records of all maintenance.
To avoid contamination, keep all covers in place where access is not required. Use paper towels during
internal maintenance.
CAUTION: Gas compressors are complicated and dangerous pieces of equipment. Only
trained operators and mechanics familiar with unit operation should attempt any
maintenance. Read and thoroughly understand the appropriate manual and always wear
appropriate personal protection equipment during maintenance. Never adjust any
fastener torques while the unit is operating or pressurized.
To reduce the risk of serious personal injury or death, verify driver or compressor
cylinder gas pressure cannot turn compressor crankshaft during maintenance. Before
any maintenance or component removal, relieve all pressure from compressor
cylinders. See packager information to completely vent the system or call the packager
for assistance. After maintenance, purge the entire system with gas prior to operation
to avoid a potentially explosive air/gas mixture.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Section 3 - Maintenance
Initial Maintenance
TABLE 3-1 Thermal Growth
of JGH:E:K:T Compressors
Comply with Ariel Packager
Standards and the Initial Frame Thermal
compressor Start Up Check Temp. Growth
List. Adhere to all items °F (°C) Inch (mm)
before and after start-up.
0 (-18) 0.019 (0.48)
For cold alignment, account
10 (-12) 0.018 (0.45)
for the difference in thermal
growth height between the 20 (-7) 0.017 (0.42)
compressor and driver. 30 (-1) 0.015 (0.39)
TABLE 3-1 lists compressor
centerline height change 40 (4) 0.014 (0.37)
based on 6.5 x 10-6/°F (11.7 50 (10) 0.013 (0.34)
x 10-6/°C).
FIGURE 3-1 Thermal Growth 60 (16) 0.012 (0.31)
NOTE: Thermal growth
70 (21) 0.011 (0.28)
numbers were calculated
using 170°F (77°C) as the 80 (27) 0.010 (0.25)
frame operating
90 (32) 0.009 (0.23)
temperature. Initial frame
temperature is the 100 (38) 0.008 (0.20)
temperature of the frame 110 (43) 0.007 (0.17)
during cold alignment.
Obtain driver thermal 120 (49) 0.006 (0.14)
growth predictions from 130 (54) 0.004 (0.12)
the driver manufacturer.
Center the coupling between
the driver and compressor so it does not thrust or force the crankshaft against either thrust face.
To ensure parallel and concentric drive
train alignment, position connected
equipment so misalignment is as close
to zero as possible. Limits for Total
Indicator Reading (TIR):
l Maximum rim (outside diameter),
(parallel) misalignment is 0.005 inch
(0.13 mm).
l Face (angular) misalignment must
be within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) for
hub diameters up to 17 inches (430
mm). For hubs greater than 17
inches (430 mm), use the following
formula: Hub O.D. x 0.0003 = max
angular misalignment. See
FIGURE 3-2.
FIGURE 3-2 Angular Coupling-Hub Face Alignment Limits
Page 3-2 of 37 REV: 07/19

Section 3 - Maintenance For models JGH:E:K:T
For laser alignment tools:

l Maximum parallel misalignment is 0.0025 inch (0.064 mm).
l Maximum angular misalignment is 0.0003 inch/1 inch (0.03mm/100mm)
NOTE: If laser is adjusted to display TIR, use TIR limits.

After running a new, relocated, reconfigured, or overhauled compressor for 24 hours, shut down, vent
the gas system, and perform the following maintenance:
1. Perform a hot alignment check within 30 minutes of shutdown as described above. Adjust discharge
bottle supports and head end supports, if applicable. NOTE: To avoid cylinder distortion, lift
discharge bottles only 0.003 to 0.005 inch (0.08 to 0.13 mm) using the supports.
2. Check fastener torque on gas nozzle flanges, valve caps, cylinder heads, piston rod packing flanges,
crosshead guide hold down, frame hold down, crosshead guide to cylinder, and crosshead guide to
frame bolting, if applicable. See Appendix A for correct torques.
3. Repeat torque check after 750 hours. Recheck fasteners found loose in any of these intervals after
an additional 750 hours. If loosening continues, contact your package supplier immediately.
Daily Maintenance
1. Log and trend the following:
l Operating RPM, gas pressure and temperatures - determine if the unit is operating within design
parameters and expectations. NOTE: Verify high and low pressure shutdowns are set as
close as practical to normal operating conditions. Set points must protect the machine
from exceeding compressor limits.
l Bearing temperatures - if the unit is equipped with main bearing temperature sensors.
l Compressor frame oil pressure - at operating temperature (190°F (88°C) max. inlet oil
temperature), it should be 50 to 60 psig (3.5 to 4.2 barg) at the filter gauges. If pressure falls
below 50 psig (3.5 barg), shut down the compressor then determine and correct the cause.
l Compressor frame inlet oil temperature.
l Cylinder valve cap temperatures.
l Compressor frame oil filter differential pressure - differential pressure exceeding the filter change
value indicates a need for a filter change. See filter information plate on top cover or “Oil Filter” on
page 3-15 for procedure.
2. Check compressor frame oil level. It should be about mid-level in the sight glass and free of foam
when running. If not, determine and correct the cause. Do not overfill. Check oil makeup tank for
sufficient oil supply. For dry sump frames, check the package sump oil level. Do not add oil to the
crankcase through the breather hole while the unit runs. This causes oil foaming and unnecessary
no-flow shutdowns in the force feed lubrication system.
3. Check force feed lubricator box oil level. It should be full to the overflow line.
4. Log and trend piston rod packing vent/drain temperature and check distance piece vents for
leakage. If the piston rod packing vent/drain temperature is trending high, then verify leak rate before
performing maintenance.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-3 of 37

5. Verify all cylinder high discharge gas temperature shutdowns are set to within 10% or as close as
practical above the normal operating discharge temperature. Do not exceed the maximum discharge
temperature shutdown setting for the application.
6. Check lubricator block cycle time. See lubricator box data plate for correct cycle time. Changes in
gas composition may require a review of cycle time. Check lube sheet for units not running at the
speed on the data tag. If applicable, verify auto relief valve indicator does not show sign of over-
pressurization.
7. Check for gas, oil, and coolant leaks.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair leaks while the unit is operating or pressurized.
8. Check for unusual noises or vibrations.

9. See packager documentation for additional recommended checks, i.e. scrubber liquid levels, dump
valve operation, cooler louver positions, etc.
Monthly Maintenance
1. Perform all Daily maintenance.
2. Verify safety shutdown functionality.
3. Sample compressor frame oil and send it to a reputable lubricant lab for analysis. See ER-56.06 for
a list of what an oil analysis should provide. If analysis results indicate increasing levels of lead, tin, or
copper particles in the oil, shut down unit. Remove frame top cover and crosshead guide side
covers. Visually inspect for debris. Do not disassemble further without good reason. If debris
indicates, replace affected parts, then change oil, oil filter, and clean the strainer with a suitable
solvent. NOTE: Operate the unit to bring oil temperature to a minimum operating
temperature of 150°F (66°C) to drive off any entrained water.
4. Check and log cylinder clearance devices in use and their settings.
Page 3-4 of 37 REV: 07/19

Six-Month (4,000-Hour) Maintenance

1. Perform all Daily and Monthly maintenance.
2. Shut down unit and allow sufficient time for components to cool.
3. Inspect crankcase breather filter and clean with suitable solvent.
4. Drain and replace force feed lubricator box oil.
5. Where applicable, clean sintered element in the small oil filter on the force feed lubrication system
now or at every main oil filter change. Use a suitable solvent. Where applicable, replace force feed
lubricator inlet filter in independent supply system.
6. Change compressor oil filter. See top cover filter information plate or “Oil Filter” on page 3-15 for
procedure. NOTE: For replaceable element style filters, drain the canister completely
before removing the element. Inspect elements for cleanliness and damage. Do not install
dirty or damaged elements.
7. Change compressor oil. Extremely dirty environments, oil supplier recommendations, or oil analysis
results may dictate a different oil change interval. Follow these steps:
l Drain oil from frame, associated piping, and oil cooler.
l Clean oil strainer with a suitable solvent. In dry sump applications, the strainer is located at the oil
reservoir.
l Remove frame top cover and crosshead guide side covers. Visually inspect for debris. Do not
disassemble further without good reason. If debris indicates, replace affected parts, then change
the oil filter and clean the strainer with a suitable solvent.
l Refill compressor frame with fresh, clean oil.
8. Check for adequate cylinder lubrication. See “Cylinder Lubrication Paper Test” on page 3-36 for
procedure.
9. Re-tighten hold down fasteners to proper torque (compressor frame feet and crosshead
guide/distance piece support feet). Inspect for frame twist or bending to verify main bearing bore
alignment. See Appendix H for flatness and soft foot requirements.
10. Perform a coupling alignment (see "Initial Maintenance").
11. Remove and inspect inlet screens on each stage; clean if clogged with debris or replace if damaged.
Clean inlet screens regularly to avoid increased pressure that may collapse them. More debris in the
screen may dictate more frequent inspections. Inlet screens may be removed if they catch little or no
debris and the gas stream is clean (optional).
REV: 07/19 Page 3-5 of 37

One-Year (8,000-Hour) Maintenance

1. Perform all Daily, Monthly, and Six-Month maintenance.
2. Grease VVCP stem threads at grease fitting, with 2 to 3 pumps of cylinder lube compatible grease
using a standard manual grease pump. Turn VVCP adjustment handle all the way in and all the way
out to lubricate the threads. Measure or count turns to return the handle to its original position.
3. Open force feed lubricator box and visually inspect pump followers, cams, and gears for wear.
4. Pressure test distribution blocks. See “Distribution Block Assembly” on page 3-28 for procedure.
5. Measure, log, and trend the following:
l Main bearing, connecting rod bearing, and crankshaft jack and thrust clearances. See page 4-
48, page 4-43, and page 4-49 . NOTE: Clearance trends along with oil analysis and
crankcase visual inspection can indicate the need for bearing replacement. Do not
disassemble to check clearances. Disassemble only if clearance checks indicate
excessive clearance. Contact Ariel for original assembly clearances.
l Crosshead to guide clearances. See “Crosshead Installation” on page 4-36.
l Piston rod runout. See “Piston Rod Runout” on page 4-22.
If any of the above items are outside limits Appendix B, find the cause and correct it. It may
require part replacement.
6. Remove valves and valve gaskets:
a. Visually inspect valve pockets for damage. Verify all old valve seat gaskets are removed.
b. Have a qualified valve repair shop disassemble, visually inspect, and refurbish the valves where
needed. Provide the valve repair shop an Ariel torque chart and valve service guide.
c. Visually inspect cylinder gas passages and clean them of all debris.
7. If applicable, visually inspect suction valve unloader actuator stems for damage or wear. Visually
inspect stem seals for damage or wear and confirm that the actuator moves freely.
8. If applicable, visually inspect pneumatic clearance pockets for damage or wear (seating surface and
stems/stem seals). Confirm that actuator moves freely.
9. Inspect cylinder bores for damage or wear. Replace the cylinder body or restore the bore if any of the
following conditions exist:
l Bore surface blemishes or gouges.
l Bore out of round more than 0.001 inch per inch of bore diameter (0.001 mm/mm) or tapered.
l Main bore is worn to counterbore diameter or larger.
10. Inspect piston rings and wearband:
a. Measure and log piston ring condition, end gap, side clearance, and piston groove width.
b. Replace rings that are damaged or outside limits listed in Appendix B.
c. When replacing rings, re-measure and log ring side clearance to check for groove wear.
d. Measure and log radial projection of wear band.
Page 3-6 of 37 REV: 07/19

11. Inspect piston rods for damage and excessive wear. Replace rod if any of these conditions exist (see
“Piston and Rod Removal” on page 4-14):
l Gouges or scratches on the rod.
l Under size more than 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
l In the packing travel length, out of round more than 0.001 inch (0.03 mm).
l Anywhere in the packing travel area, tapered more than 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) .
12. Rebuild piston rod pressure packing cases. See “Piston Rod Packing” on page 4-25 for procedure.
13. Re-install valves, retainers, and valve caps using new valve seat gaskets and valve cap O-
rings/seals. See “Valve Installation” on page 4-11. Use proper installation techniques and torque
procedures for valve caps.
14. Check and re-calibrate all required instrumentation.
15. Clean crankcase breather filter with suitable solvent.
16. Check and, if needed, adjust drive chains. See “Chain Adjustment” on page 4-53 for procedure.
17. If the compressor is equipped with crankcase over-pressure relief valves, visually inspect and
exercise valves to manufacturer recommendations.
18. Check fastener torques of gas nozzle flanges, head end head or unloader, valve caps, piston rod
packings, crosshead pin thru- bolts, crosshead guide to frame, frame hold down, crosshead guide to
cylinder, cylinder mounting flange to forged steel cylinder, distance piece to cylinder, distance piece
to crosshead guide, and tandem cylinder to cylinder.
Two-Year (16,000-Hour) Maintenance

1. Perform all Daily, Monthly, Six-Month, and One-Year maintenance.
2. Rebuild oil wiper cases.
3. If applicable, use new piston and stem seals to rebuild actuators on suction valve unloaders and
fixed volume pneumatic pockets. Replace piston stem assemblies where stem is damaged or worn.
4. Check auxiliary end chain drive for undercut sprocket teeth and chain for excessive stretching.
Replace as required.
Three-Year (24,000-Hour) Maintenance

1. Perform all Daily, Monthly, Six-Month, and One-Year maintenance.
2. Replace non-ELP connecting rod bearings for JGE:T models. See “Connecting Rods” on page 4-
38. NOTE: Main and connecting rod bearing wear and replacement intervals are heavily
dependent on many factors including speed, load, oil temperature, oil cleanliness, and oil
quality. Depending on the severity of service, the bearing maintenance interval may be
longer or shorter.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-7 of 37

Four-Year (32,000-Hour) Maintenance

1. Perform all Daily, Monthly, Six-Month, One-Year, and Two-Year maintenance.
2. Remove crosshead pins. Measure and log crosshead pin to crosshead pin bore and connecting rod
bushing bore clearances. Check crosshead pin end caps and thru-bolt for wear. Replace if needed.
3. Check for bushing wear in the auxiliary end drive chain tightener.
4. Check for ring groove wear in pistons.
Six-Year (48,000-Hour) Maintenance

1. Perform all Daily, Monthly, Six-Month, One-Year, Two-Year, and Three-Year maintenance.
2. Replace lubricator distribution blocks.
3. Replace crosshead bushings and connecting rod bushings. See “Crossheads” on page 4-34 and
“Connecting Rods” on page 4-38.
4. Replace connecting rod bearings. See “Connecting Rods” on page 4-38.
5. Replace main bearings. See “Crankshafts” on page 4-44.
6. Replace auxiliary end torsional damper, if applicable. See assembly drawing in compressor build
book for procedure.
Frame Oil
There are several oil specifications, maintenance procedures, and operating conditions which affect oil
performance. For optimal performance, ensure the oil meets the specifications below and is suitable for
the given application, and diligently complete maintenance procedures.
Viscosity
The minimum allowable viscosity of the oil entering the frame is 16 cSt. Typically, this is the viscosity of
ISO 150 grade oil at about 190°F (88°C). The maximum viscosity at this temperature is 60 cSt. For
JGH:E:K:T frames, the maximum viscosity to start the compressor is 3,300 cSt and the maximum
viscosity to load the compressor is 1,000 cSt. See FIGURE 3-3.
Page 3-8 of 37 REV: 07/19

FIGURE 3-3 Viscosity vs. Temperature Graph of Different Lubricants
REV: 07/19 Page 3-9 of 37
Oil Pressure
The factory sets normal pressure on the discharge side of the oil filter at 60 psig (4.1 barg) for
compressors tested mechanically complete (inspector tag displayed). If factory tested as mechanically
incomplete (no inspector tag), the packager sets normal oil pressure at initial start-up to 60 psig (4.1
barg) at the lower of the frame or cylinder rated speed, or driver speed at normal operating temperature.
Adjust the oil pressure after the filter to 60 psig at minimum operating speed and normal operating
temperature.
Ariel uses the pump safety relief valve to regulate pressure into the compressor. If oil pressure into the
compressor at minimum operating speed and normal operating temperature does not read about 60
psig (4.1 barg), adjust the pump safety relief valve. With compressor running at minimum operating
speed, turn the adjustment screw clockwise to increase oil pressure, or counter-clockwise to decrease
it. The compressor requires a 45 psig (3.1 barg) low oil pressure shutdown for protection.
NOTE: If oil pressure drops below 50 PSIG (3.4 barg) when crankshaft speed equals or
exceeds minimum rated operating speed, find the cause and correct it.
Oil Temperature
Maintain frame inlet oil temperature as close to 170°F (77°C) as possible. Minimum lube oil operating
temperature is 150°F (66°C) to drive off water vapor. Maximum allowable oil temperature into the
compressor frame is 190°F (88°C). Higher temperatures increase the oxidation rate of mineral oil.
Every 18°F (10°C) within the operating range doubles the oxidation rate of mineral oil.
For proper operation of the thermostatic control valve, the maximum differential pressure between the
hot oil supply line and the cooled oil return line is 10 psid (0.7 bard).
Oil Maintenance
An oil analysis program is the most effective way to determine frame oil change intervals. Consistent oil
analysis can identify when to change oil on the basis of need rather than a scheduled interval.
Depending on service, oil analysis can significantly extend oil change intervals.
Install a sampling point between the oil pump and filter at an easily accessible location . Minimize dirt or
debris that can collect around it. Use a needle valve to better control pressurized oil flow.
Collect and analyze oil samples to verify suitability for continued service. Oil analysis should include:
l Viscosity testing at 104°F (40°C) and 212°F (100°C). This verifies that oil has not mixed with cylinder
oils or process gas.
l Particle counting to the latest version of ISO 4406.
l Spectroscopy to determine wear metals, contaminants, and additives.
l FTIR (Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy) to check for oxidation, water or coolant
contamination, and additive depletion. This is more important if the sump oil is not consumed by the
force feed system.
Page 3-10 of 37 REV: 07/19

Dry Sump
Compressors subject to transient motion, roll, and yaw on board a ship or a floating platform may
require a dry sump (“dry” crankcase and separate oil reservoir).
With a dry sump, drains are supplied at each end of the compressor frame and an additional oil pump
chain oiler is provided by Ariel. The packager must provide a lube oil reservoir sized and located so that
the oil pump has oil suction regardless of the tilt of the ship or floating platform. An oil sump strainer
must be installed in the pump suction line at the outlet of the separate lube oil reservoir (unmounted
strainer is provided by Ariel with a new dry sump compressor).
Oil System Cleanliness

Clean the compressor frame oil piping system and components of all foreign matter such as sand, rust,
mill scale, metal chips, weld spatter, grease, and paint. Use proper cleaning procedures with proper
cleaners, acids, and/or mechanical cleaning to meet cleanliness requirements. Ariel recommends
flushing all oil-piping systems with an electric or pneumatic driven pump and filtered, clean production
oil. Ariel thoroughly cleans all compressor frame cavities prior to assembly and test runs compressors
with a filtered closed loop lube system.
NOTE: Ariel recommends not disturbing lube oil piping downstream of the installed oil filter.
Contaminants that enter this piping or open ports flush into the bearings causing
catastrophic damage. If contamination is suspected in the supply piping downstream of the
oil filter or in the oil gallery, remove the supply piping and thoroughly clean both the piping
and gallery. Before performing this work, contact Ariel Technical Service for best practices
and procedures. To remove or alter piping, cover the inlets to the oil gallery, the ends of the
piping, and the filter outlet so no contaminants enter. Before reinstallation, chemical and
mechanical cleaning is required. Flush the pipe in accordance with Ariel cleanliness
requirements (see TABLE 3-2).
Prior to start-up, flush all compressors installed with an electric or pneumatic powered pre-lube pump
and less than 50 feet (15 m) of oil piping as outlined below. Include cooler oil passages in the flushing
loop. While oil systems for compressors without an electric or pneumatic powered pre-lube pump and
less than 50 feet (15 m) of oil piping must be clean, oil flushing is desirable, but not required.
For all compressors with oil piping systems greater than 50 feet (15 m), cleaning and flushing must
result in a cleanliness level to ISO-4406, Grade 13/10/9 and/or NAS-1638, Class 5 (see TABLE 3-2),
prior to start-up.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-11 of 37

TABLE 3-2 Oil Flush Cleanliness

1. Prior to assembling lube oil piping, remove scale, weld Requirements
slag, rust and any other matter that could contaminate
lube oil. Confirm: ISO-4406 GRADE 13/10/9
l Complete and closed lube oil system. Particle

Grade Particles
Size µm/ml
Crankcase filled to the correct level with appropriate Requirement Allowed
l Oil Sample
oil.
/13 Greater than 4 40 to 80
l Proper and correctly installed lube oil filters.
/10 Greater than 6 5 to 10
l Operational and viewable oil pressure transducer or /9 Greater than 2.5 to 5
gauge, oil filter differential-pressure transducers or 14
gauges, and oil temperature RTD or indicator.
2. Start pre-lube pump. Record oil pressure, oil filter NAS-1638 GRADE 5
differential-pressure, and oil temperature. Minimum oil
pressure is 30 psig (2.1 barg) for effective flushing. Do Particle Size Range
Grade 5 Maximum
not exceed 90 psig (6.2 barg). µm/100ml Oil
Particles Allowed
Sample
3. Flush continuously for one hour. Oil filter differential-
pressure must not increase more than 10% of measured 5 to 15 8,000
oil pressure into the filter. Record the oil pressure, oil 15 to 25 1,424
filter differential pressure, and oil temperature every 15
25 to 50 253
minutes. Oil temperature increases of more than 10°F
(5.5°C) during an hour of flushing invalidate the system 50 to 100 45
cleanliness test, due to oil viscosity change.
Over 100 8
4. After one hour of pre-lube flushing, if differential pressure
or temperature increases exceed the limits above,
continue flushing. If the lube oil filter differential pressure
exceeds change filter limits, stop the pre-lube pump and change the oil filter. To ensure system
cleanliness, re-set time and continue flushing until the compressor achieves a continuous hour of
flushing within differential pressure and temperature increase limits.
See ISO-4406 "International Standard - Hydraulic fluid power - Fluids - Method for coding level of
contamination by solid particles" and/or NAS-1638 "National Aerospace Standard, Aerospace
Industries Association of America, Inc. - Cleanliness Requirements for Parts Used in Hydraulic
Systems" for complete information. Use a competent oil lab for sample testing. To flush the entire oil
system see “Flushing Procedure” on page 3-21.
Page 3-12 of 37 REV: 07/19

Frame Oil System Components
Oil Connections(see Ariel outline drawing for details) System Components
A1 Packager connection from oil pump 1. Y-Strainer

A2 Packager connection to oil filter 2. Compressor driven oil pump (with safety relief
A3 Oil connection from compressor crankcase (oil valve for pressure regulation, or in models with a
sump) separate regulating valve (7), for relief)
A4 Lube oil compressor inlet connection to gallery 3. Thermostatic control valve, 170°F (77°C) nominal
tube -Oil flows to crankshaft main bearings, rating - required
connecting rod bearings, crosshead pins, and 4. Pre-lube oil pump - required (shown with oil
bushings. heating circuit, when applicable), or auxiliary
A5 Pressure regulating valve return connection to oil pump.
sump (when applicable) 5. Optional duplex oil filter
A6 Filter vent return connection to oil sump (when 6. Oil filter
applicable on some models) 7. Oil cooler - required
A7 Oil tubing connections from frame gallery tube to 8. Check valve
top and bottom of crosshead guides to lubricate 9. Heater (when applicable).
crossheads. 10. Temperature indicator
A8 Compressor crankcase oil drain (oil sump drain) 11. Pressure indicator (dirty side)
A9 Pre-lube/recirculation/heater connections (4) 12. Pressure indicator (clean side)
13. Pressure indicator/shutdown connection
FIGURE 3-4 Standard Frame Lube Oil Schematic
REV: 07/19 Page 3-13 of 37

Oil Strainer
An oil strainer installed upstream of the pump prevents debris from entering the pump and damaging it.
Ariel supplies a 30 mesh (595 microns) strainer on all JGH:E:K:T compressors. It is located on the
auxiliary end of the crankcase below oil level. Remove the strainer basket and wash it in an appropriate
solvent whenever lubricating oil is changed.
Oil Pump & Regulating

Valve
The oil pump constantly supplies oil to
all journal bearings, bushings, and
crosshead sliding surfaces. The
crankshaft drives it by a chain and
sprocket to provide adequate oil flow to
bearings when the compressor
operates at the minimum speed rating
(typically half of maximum rated
speed).
JGH:E:K:T compressors maintain oil FIGURE 3-5 Typical Lube Oil Pump
pressure with a spring-loaded safety
relief valve within the pump head (see
FIGURE 3-4). With the unit running at minimum operating speed and the frame lube oil at operating
temperature, 170°F (77°C), remove the dust cap to expose the safety relief valve adjustment screw and
set it so the pressure gauge on the clean side of the oil filter reads 60 psig (4.1 barg).
When installing a new oil pump on a compressor or after maintenance on an existing oil pump, Ariel
recommends priming the pump (wetting the gears with oil) before start-up to ensure proper operation.
Upon compressor start-up after oil pump replacement, oil pressure should immediately reach 50-60 psi.
If oil pressure fails to reach 50-60 psi immediately, shut down the compressor and correct the problem.
Dry oil pump gears sometimes contribute to the problem.
Oil Cooler
An oil cooler is required to remove heat from the frame lube oil. When sizing an oil cooler, consider
temperature and flow rate of both cooling medium and lube oil. Insufficient cooling water flow rate is the
primary cause of high oil temperatures. Mount cooler as close to the compressor as possible with piping
of adequate size to minimize pressure drop of both lube oil and cooling medium.
The Application Manual lists required cooling water temperature and flow rate to properly cool oil with
Ariel supplied coolers. The Ariel Performance Program lists oil heat rejection data for each frame in the
frame details section (contact Ariel for details).
Page 3-14 of 37 REV: 07/19

Oil Temperature Control

Valve
The lube oil system requires a
thermostatic valve to control
compressor oil temperature. A
thermostatic valve is a three-way valve
with a temperature sensitive element.
As the oil heats, the sensing element
opens the third port in the valve.
Thermostatic control valve configuration may vary from this
schematic depending on valve size. Valve connections A-B-C are
Ariel recommends a thermostatic valve
marked on the valve.
with a 170°F (77°C) element. Install the
valve in mixing mode to more directly FIGURE 3-6 Thermostatic Valve in Mixing Mode
control oil temperature into the frame
(see FIGURE 3-6).
Oil Filter
All compressor frames require oil filters to remove particle contamination that can damage equipment
and oil. Contaminants that damage equipment include wear particles from equipment, airborne
particles such as dust or sand, and particulates in new oil. Contaminants that damage oil include
oxidized oil components and air bubbles.
l Ariel filters are not designed for reverse flow often caused by pumping oil out of the compressor
through the filter. This can invert and tear the filter media, sending dirty oil to crankshaft bearings.
l With canister style filters, always drain oil filter housing before element removal or dirty oil will be
sent to crankshaft bearings.
l Keep new filter elements sealed in their original packaging during storage. Visually inspect filter
internal/external surfaces prior to installation. Do not install damaged, corroded, or contaminated
filters.
JGH:E:K:T2/4 compressors ship with simplex, spin-on, non-bypassing, resin-impregnated filters as

standard. Spin-on filters carry a 5 micron nominal and 17 micron absolute rating. The Beta ratings are
ß5 = 2 and ß17 = 75. Many spin-on filters fit an Ariel compressor, but very few meet filtration ratings of
Ariel filters. Do not use aftermarket filters.
JGE:K:T/6 compressors ship with simplex or duplex cartridge style pleated synthetic filters as standard.
Cartridge filters are rated as 1 micron nominal and 12 micron absolute filters. The Beta ratings are ß1 =
2, ß5 = 10 and ß12 = 75.
Pressure gauges monitor pressure drop across the filter. High differential pressure indicates a plugged
filter. Ariel recommends lube oil filter replacement every 6 months, or 4000 hours, or when oil filter
differential pressure at normal operating temperature reaches 10 psid (0.7 bard) for spin-on filters or 15
psid (1.0 bard) for cartridge filters, whichever comes first. On start-up, differential pressure may exceed
the filter replacement limit until the oil reaches operating temperature. On the same schedule, or with
every main oil filter change, clean the sintered element in the small oil filter of the force feed lubricator.
CAUTION: Before beginning oil filter replacement, use the frame mounted pressure
gauges to confirm the system is depressurized. Be careful - lube oil may be hot and may
cause burns. Wear proper personal protection equipment.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-15 of 37

Simplex Spin-on Filter Replacement

NOTE: Replace oil filters only with Ariel approved
filters.
1. Remove old filter, clean filter head surfaces, and verify
old gasket is removed.
2. Inspect new filter for damage or debris. Do not install
damaged or dirty filters. Never operate a unit with a
damaged or leaking oil filter.
3. Apply clean oil to the filter gasket and thread the filter
with gasket onto the head.
4. Tighten the filter one turn after the filter gasket contacts
the head. Install 1/2 inch NPT drain plug.
5. Use the compressor pre-lube pump to fill the oil filter with
oil and purge air from the oil system. Manually filling the FIGURE 3-7 Mounted Thermostatic Valve
Drain Plug
filter with oil can introduce debris on the clean side of the
filter. This debris can damage the compressor to the
point of catastrophic bearing failure.
6. After starting the unit, check for leaks, and retighten if necessary.
Page 3-16 of 37 REV: 07/19

Simplex Filter Cartridge Replacement 1. 3/4" NPT Vent

2. Top Cover
NOTE: Replaceable filter elements are 3. Top Cover O-Ring
delicate and require proper storage to 4. Spring Plate
prevent material degradation, flash rust Assembly
inside, contamination, etc. Inspect elements 5. Filter Element
for cleanliness and damage. Do not install 6. Filter Vessel
7. Drain Plug
1. Remove 3/4” NPT drain plug and drain oil FIGURE 3-8 Typical Oil
completely. Filter Vessels
2. While the oil drains, open 3/4” NPT vent.

3. After the oil drains completely, remove top
cover, spring plate assembly, and filter
element.
CAUTION: Carefully lift the filter

element out of the canister and place it
in a drip pan. Do not let oil from the
filter element drain back into the filter
vessel once it is unseated
4. Inspect interior of filter vessel for debris. Clean

if needed.
5. Place new element over seat in bottom of
vessel. It requires a small amount of force to
seat the element into the housing.
6. Re-install spring plate assembly.
7. Inspect cover O-ring for wear. Replace if
needed.
8. Close drain.
9. Install cover. Torque nuts to 75 Lb x Ft (102
N•m).
10. Use compressor pre-lube pump to fill the oil
filter with oil and purge air from the oil system.
Manually filling the filter with oil can introduce
debris on the clean side of the filter. Debris
can damage the compressor to the point of
catastrophic bearing failure.
11. Release trapped air through vent. Check for
leaks.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-17 of 37

Compact Duplex Filter Cartridge Replacement

1. The triangle indicator on top of the transfer valve handle
points toward the active filter. Turn transfer valve handle
until it stops to make the inactive filter the active filter.
2. Loosen the inactive filter vent to relieve any pressure.
3. Drain the inactive filter housing.
4. Remove the filter housing, clean and inspect.
5. Remove the filter element and properly dispose of.
6. Inspect new filter element and place it new element over
seat in the top of filter head. It will require a small amount
of force to seat the element onto the filter head.
7. Install drain plug in the filter housing.
8. Inspect and replace the filter gasket if damaged. Install
the gasket and attach the filter housing. Step torque the
bolts to 40 Lb x Ft (54 N•m). 1. Filter Vent 4. Filter Housing
2. Transfer Valve 5. Filter Element
9. Use compressor pre-lube pump to fill the oil filter with oil Indicator 6. Filter Gasket
and purge air from the oil system. Manually filling the filter 3. Filter Head 7. Drain Plug
with oil can introduce debris on the clean side of the filter.
Debris can damage the compressor to the point of FIGURE 3-9 Typical Compact Duplex
catastrophic bearing failure. Filter Vessels
10. Release trapped air through vent. Check for leaks.
Duplex Filter Cartridge Replacement

NOTE: Replaceable filter elements are
delicate and require proper storage to
prevent material degradation, flash rust
inside, contamination, etc. Inspect elements
for cleanliness and damage. Do not install
1. Open equalization valve to equalize pressure
between the filters.
2. The triangle indicator on top of the transfer
valve handle points toward the active filter.
Turn transfer valve handle until it stops to
make the inactive filter the active filter.
3. Close equalization valve.
4. Verify no oil is flowing through the inactive
filter. Vent trapped air, if necessary.
5. Follow steps of "Simplex Filter Cartridge FIGURE 3-10 Typical Duplex Oil Filter
Replacement" for the inactive filter.
Page 3-18 of 37 REV: 07/19

Transfer Valve Seal Replacement

CAUTION: Do not twist the valve plug during removal or installation. It causes
permanent damage to the valve plug and/or valve body machined surfaces.
Valve Disassembly
1. Bring the arrow on the valve plug to the extreme left or
right position. Remove the handle.
2. Clean top and bottom of valve assembly of all
contaminants.
3. Remove top retaining ring from valve body. NOTE: The
retaining rings are in a honed valve body and
require special care at removal. Improper handling
may permanently damage the valve body and void
the warranty.
4. Install 1/2-13 NC eye bolt (supplied with valve plug seal
kit) into tapped hole at stem side of valve plug and slowly FIGURE 3-11 Typical Transfer Valve
pull the plug straight out. If required, lightly push or tap on
the bottom center of the plug with a non-metallic hammer
or rod. NOTE: DO NOT twist the valve plug!
Check for any damage to the valve plug and valve body. Do not attempt any parts repair without factory
consultation. Parts are machined to close tolerances. Inspect and replace all seals. Quad-ring removal
may require a solvent such as MEK.
Valve Assembly
NOTE: Cleanliness helps ensure proper sealing and long seal life.
Clean all parts before assembly. Foreign particles, dirt, metal chips, etc.
in the valve may cause leakage, damage the seals, and reduce seal life.
1. Valve must be clean and dry before installing seals. Install the three o-rings
and two quad-rings on valve plug. Avoid twisting seals during assembly.
After seal installation, place valve plug in a horizontal position. On each
straight run (2 places) of each installed quad-ring, carefully lift quad-ring
partially out of the groove and sparingly apply a coating of adhesive (about 2”
long) to the bottom of the machined groove. Place quad-ring back into
groove. NOTE: Avoid eye and skin contact with adhesive.
FIGURE 3-12 Typical
2. Apply a lubricant compatible with seals and fluid used on the valve plug and Valve Plug
inside the clean valve body.
3. Hold valve plug by the eye bolt and verify the arrow is in the original left or right position. Align roll pin
with the slot in the bottom of the plug and push or lightly tap the valve plug assembly into the valve
body until it stops. NOTE: DO NOT twist plug while reinstalling!
REV: 07/19 Page 3-19 of 37

4. Install retaining ring.

5. Unscrew eye bolt and install handle.
6. Test for any binding or leakage. If assembled properly, valve is ready for use.
CAUTION: During unit installation, proper alignment of inlet/outlet piping ensures

proper valve operation. When tightening piping, check valve handle rotation periodically
for smooth operation. Any misalignment may cause torque on the valve and valve plug
binding. If binding occurs, loosen piping and re-check alignment.
Compressor Pre-lube System

Ariel compressors must be pre-lubed anytime the crankshaft is turned and prior to starting. Ariel
strongly recommends an automated pre-lube system to extend driveline component life.
Ariel requires automated pre-lube systems for compressors that meet any of the following criteria:
l Electric motor driven compressors.
l Unattended-start compressors, regardless of driver type.
See FIGURE 3-4 for pre-lube circuit design.

NOTE: The pre-lube return into the frame must be upstream of the oil filter.
For on-demand compressor applications, the pre-lube pump can circulate oil continuously through the
bearings while on standby.
Ariel requirements are based on a pre-lube pump sized for 25% of frame oil pump flow to ensure oil flow
to bearings, bushings, and oil-filled clearances prior to turning or start-up (see Appendix C for frame oil
pump flow rates).
The following statements depend on oil supply and sump viscosities, which depend on oil temperature.
Oil supply temperature at the filter head or frame oil gallery is not always a true representation of total oil
sump temperature. See FIGURE 3-3 to determine oil viscosity based on temperature.
l During a cold start of the unit when oil supply viscosity is greater than 50 cSt, pre-lube pressure
should be 30 psig (2.1 barg) at the oil gallery for a minimum of 2 minutes prior to turning or starting.
l During a hot re-start of the unit when oil supply viscosity is less than 50 cSt, pre-lube pressure should
be 20 psig (1.4 barg) at the oil gallery for a minimum of 2 minutes prior to turning or starting.
NOTE: A 10 to 15 minute pre-lube is required after:

l Any major drive line maintenance
l The main lube oil system is drained
l Oil filter replacement
Instrumentation: Automated pre-lube systems require a start permissive logic and instrumentation to
satisfy the minimum required pressure and duration at the oil gallery inlet.
It is highly recommended that the compressor low oil pressure shutdown be Class B. Inhibited time shall
be no longer than 10 seconds after idle speed is achieved on gas engines or start initiation for electric
motors.
Page 3-20 of 37 REV: 07/19

If the compressor fails to achieve 45 psig (3.1 barg) oil pressure within 10 seconds after reaching
engine idle speed or electric motor start initiation, ensure shutdown and correct the cause. Repeat pre-
lube before each start attempt.
NOTE: If a compressor fails to start or shuts down at start-up due to low oil pressure, DO
NOT re-start until the cause is corrected.
Flushing to Change to a PAG Lubricant

Cylinder and frame lubrication systems require flushing when changing to or from a PAG lubricant or
when applying a PAG lubricant to newly installed equipment.
Recommended Flushing Oil

The preferred flushing oil is soluble in both the original oil and PAG lubricant. A linear diester is
preferred, such as Shell Corena DE 150 or Mobil Rarus 829. If this is unavailable, use the desired PAG
lubricant fill oil as the initial flushing oil.
Flushing Procedure
Below is a general flushing procedure recommended to change from mineral or PAO oils to a synthetic
PAG lubricant.
1. Drain old oil from frame while the oil is still warm.
2. Drain all supply and return lines upstream of the frame lube oil filter, filter housing (if applicable),
coolers, and other peripheral equipment in the lubricant supply loop.
3. Remove standing oil in the frame and guide compartment low points. Remove as much oil as
possible with a vacuum hose. If heavy deposits are visible, remove them as best as possible by hand
using clean, dry, lint-free rags.
4. Install new frame lube oil filters.
5. Remove and either clean or replace the Y-strainer element.
6. Reconnect oil piping and install drain plug in frame.
7. Connect a diaphragm pump upstream of the frame mounted oil filter.
8. Feed the diaphragm pump flushing oil (see "Recommended Flushing Oil") from a clean reservoir
and prime the lube oil system. Prime until old oil is purged from oil passages and flushing oil steadily
flows from all bearings and crosshead bushings.
9. Drain frame. Remove standing oil in the frame and guide compartment low points. Remove as much
oil as possible with a vacuum hose.
10. Remove diaphragm pump and plug connection upstream of frame mounted oil filter.
11. Install drain plug in frame.
12. Refill the frame with flushing oil (see "Recommended Flushing Oil").
13. Circulate flushing oil for at least four hours, and up to 24 hours if needed, to loosen all debris and
existing deposits. Monitor lube oil filter differential pressure during flushing. The filter may need to be
taken off line or changed several times during flushing, as loosened deposits tend to plug the filter
quickly.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-21 of 37

14. Drain the first flushing oil from the frame while the oil is still warm. Take care to also drain all supply
and return lines, filter housing, and other peripheral equipment in the lubricant supply loop. If
standing oil remains in the frame, remove as much as possible with a vacuum hose.
15. Refill the frame with the PAG lubricant of the recommended viscosity for the application. At this time,
as much as 2-3% of the initial oil may still remain in the system. Circulate this fill for at least four hours
and up to 24 hours if possible. Replace filters as needed.
NOTE: If the PAG lubricant is clear and bright after circulating and no debris or emulsion
is visible, it may be possible to skip the final steps and simply begin normal operation.
However, a second flush is preferred (see steps 16 and 17).
16. Drain second flushing (PAG lubricant) oil from the frame while the oil is still warm.
17. Refill frame with PAG lubricant of the recommended viscosity and circulate for at least four hours. At
this point, the initial oil remaining in the system should be less than 0.5%. Sample the oil and examine
it for any emulsion or debris. If the oil is clear and bright (a slight haze is acceptable), then continue
normal operation and top off as needed. If significant emulsion or debris remains, then conduct one
more drain and flush.
If the frame uses the same oil as the force-feed cylinder lubrication system, the overflow line on the
lubricator box can remain attached to the frame auxiliary end cover. If the frame oil and cylinder oil are
incompatible or of different ISO grades, disconnect overflow line on the lubricator box (see
"Independent Oil Supply"). Fill the force-feed lubricator box with the same oil used to lubricate the
compressor cylinders/packings. To change the lubricator box lubricant from a mineral oil or synthetic
PAO lubricant to a PAG synthetic lubricant:
1. Drain old oil from lubricator box.
2. Rinse lubricator box with flushing oil (see "Recommended Flushing Oil").
3. Fill lubricator box with PAG lubricant to be used for the cylinders.
Flushing the Force Feed Lubrication System

Common Oil Supply
1. If installed, drain the sintered filter and clean the element with solvent.
2. Drain the lube line upstream of the force feed pump inlet.
3. Drain tubing/manifold feeding the force feed pump(s).
4. Remove the purge/vent connection on the outlet of each force feed pump.
5. Use a purge pump filled with clean/filtered flushing oil (see "Recommended Flushing Oil") to prime
each force feed pump by forcing oil through the pump inlet and out the purge/vent connection.
6. Reconnect the purge pump to the force feed pump purge/vent outlet connection. If pumps are paired
together at their outlets, close one of the purge/vent connections.
7. For the zone fed by the force feed pump being primed, disconnect lube lines at the inlet of the
double-ball check valves.
8. Place paper towels or suitable collection containers beneath each disconnected lube line to catch
flushing oil during priming.
Page 3-22 of 37 REV: 07/19

9. Prime flushing oil from the force feed pump purge/vent connection to downstream tubing, divider
blocks, and check valves.
10. Prime until no air bubbles appear in the flushing oil at all disconnected lube lines in the zone.
11. Reconnect lube lines to double ball check valves in the primed zone.
12. Continue to prime 2 fluid ounces of oil per throw through the primed zone.
13. Repeat steps 6 thru 12 for remaining zones.
Independent Oil Supply

1. Drain daytank, oil filter, and lube lines upstream of the force feed pump inlet. Oil trapped in piping
can be vacuumed out or flushing oil can be pumped through these lines to displace the old oil.
2. If installed, drain the sintered filter and clean the element with solvent.
3. Drain tubing/manifold feeding the force feed pump(s).
4. Remove the purge/vent connection on the outlet of each force feed pump.
5. Use a purge pump filled with clean/filtered flushing oil (See "Recommended Flushing Oil") to prime
each force feed pump by forcing oil through the pump inlet and out the purge/vent connection.
6. Reconnect the purge pump to the force feed pump purge/vent outlet connection. If pumps are paired
together at their outlets, close one of the purge/vent connections.
7. For the zone fed by the force feed pump being primed, disconnect lube lines at the inlet of the
double-ball check valves.
8. Place paper towels or suitable collection containers beneath each disconnected lube line to catch
flushing oil during priming.
9. Prime flushing oil from the force feed pump purge/vent connection to downstream tubing, divider
blocks, and check valves.
10. Prime until no air bubbles appear in the flushing oil at all disconnected lube lines in the zone.
11. Reconnect lube lines to double ball check valves in the primed zone.
12. Continue to prime 2 fluid ounces of flushing oil per throw through the primed zone.
13. Disconnect the purge pump and install cap for purge/vent connection.
14. Repeat steps 6 thru 12 for remaining zones.
15. Install a new oil filter.
16. Reconnect lube lines between daytank and pump inlets. Reinstall sintered filter (if provided).
17. Place a collection container beneath the disconnected lube line near the force feed pump inlet
connection.
18. Add enough flushing oil to the daytank to prime the system up to the disconnected line in step 17.
19. Collect oil until no air bubbles appear in the flushing oil.
20. Reconnect feed line to force feed pump.
21. Bleed trapped air by loosening tube connections nearest each pump inlet.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-23 of 37

Cylinder and Packing Lubrication

The cylinder lubrication system injects lubrication into cylinder bores and packings. The system consists
of an oil supply, an oil filter, a force feed lubricator pump, divider blocks, pressure indicators, check
valves, and flow monitoring shutdown devices. The system is progressive; each piston in the divider
block must complete a cycle before the system cycles again. This type of system offers better lubrication
precision and eases monitoring.
Force Feed Lubricator

The force feed lubrication system oils the compressor cylinders and piston rod packings. Oil flows to the
suction side of the force feed lubricator pump directly from the pressure side of the frame lubrication
system, or from an overhead tank. A self-contained oil reservoir oils the force feed lubricator worm gear
and cam. The force feed lubricator sight glass shows the reservoir oil level.
1. Auto-Relief Valve (ARV)

2. ARV Manifold
3. Priming Stem
4. Pump Plunger Stroke
Adjustment Screw
5. Lock Nut
6. Lubricator Oil Fill Connection
7. Sight Glass
8. Mounting Flange Capscrews
(4)
9. Drain Plug
10. Purge/Vent Connection
11. Pump Outlet to Distribution
Block
12. Inlet to ARV
13. Lubricator Overflow
14. Force Feed Lubricator
Sprocket
15. O-ring
16. Inlet Header
17. Pump Inlet from Header
18. Rupture Disk Assembly
FIGURE 3-13 Typical Force Feed Lubricator
Page 3-24 of 37 REV: 07/19

Priming the Pump

Use filtered oil when priming the pump and force feed system (minimum 5 micron nominal filter). Refer
to FIGURE 3-14 during priming.
1. Remove and discard the plastic plugs in the pump inlet
and outlet.
2. Apply thread sealant (user supplied) to inlet and outlet
line fittings.
3. Install the inlet and outlet fittings on the pump.
4. Connect the inlet line to the inlet fitting.
5. Introduce oil into the inlet line using a clean priming pump
filled with cylinder oil connected to the purge/vent
connection. If installed, open oil supply valve from day
tank (located upstream from pump).
6. Wipe the pump priming stem clean and lubricate with oil.
7. Manually prime pump by using a priming pump or by
pressing the pump priming stem repeatedly (if connected
to a day tank) until clean, air-free oil flows from the outlet
fitting. 1. O-ring 4. Pump Priming
8. Connect outlet line to outlet fitting. 2. Flow Adjustment Stem
Screw Locknut 5. Pump Inlet
9. Manually prime pump by using a priming pump until 3. Flow Adjustment 6. Pump Outlet
clean, air-free oil flows from the outlet line at the cylinder Screw
and packing lube points.
FIGURE 3-14 Pump Priming and
10. Connect the outlet line to the lube point. Adjustment
11. After start-up, adjust individual pumps to meet required

flow rates. See "Pump Adjustment".
Pump Adjustment
The flow adjustment screw controls pump flow rate; turning it changes the length of the piston stroke
which changes the pump discharge volume. Refer to FIGURE 3-14 during adjustment.
1. Loosen the flow adjustment screw locknut.
2. Lubricate the o-ring beneath the adjustment screw locknut with oil.
3. Turn the flow adjustment screw. Counterclockwise increases flow and decreases cycle time;
clockwise decreases flow and increases cycle time.
4. Check force feed lubricator data plate or Ariel lube sheets for correct cycle time. Adjust flow until
desired cycle time is achieved with the force feed system operating.
5. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as needed.
6. After adjustment to the proper cycle time, tighten the adjustment screw locknut.
NOTE: Inconsistent flow can occur if pump stroke is set below 20% of maximum stroke. A
dust seal inside the flow adjustment screw holds the priming stem stationary during
operation.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-25 of 37

Auto-Relief Valve (ARV)

An auto-relief valve (ARV) is a mechanical valve that protects force-feed lubrication systems from over-
pressure conditions. Unlike a rupture disk assembly, the ARV is reusable and does not expel oil onto the
compressor skid.
1. Spring Barrel 5. Spring 9. Pressure Pin 13. E-Clip

2. O-ring 6. Spring Piston 10. Intermediate Barrel 14. ARV Outlet
3. Washer 7. O-ring Retainer 11. ARV Inlet (Bypass Port)
4. Indicator Pin 8. Manifold 12. Adapter
FIGURE 3-15 Auto-Relief Valve Components
ARV Operation
When a force-feed pump encounters a
downstream restriction, pump discharge pressure
increases. If discharge pressure exceeds ARV
cracking pressure, the ARV bypasses excess oil
back to the low-pressure inlet side of the pump
(FIGURE 3-16 – High Pressure). Bypassing oil
limits the pressure created by the pump. The
pump will operate in bypass condition until either
the divider valve no-flow device times out due to
lack of flow or pressure downstream of the pump
decreases allowing the ARV to close (FIGURE 3-
16 – Pressure Relieved).
When the ARV begins bypassing, an indicator pin
protrudes from the top of the ARV indicating an
over-pressure condition. The indicator pin is a
“tattle tale” and remains protruding after the ARV
FIGURE 3-16 ARV Operation
bypasses oil (FIGURE 3-16 – Pressure
Relieved). Two bypass conditions are possible:
Intermittent blockage downstream of the pump - A brief condition or one-time event that prevents
the shutdown device from timing out and allows the compressor to continue to operate.
Significant blockage downstream of the pump - A condition of long enough duration to cause the
shutdown device to timeout and shutdown the compressor.
After downstream blockage/restriction removal, the indicator pin can be manually reset by depressing
the indicator pin until it is flush with the ARV housing.
Page 3-26 of 37 REV: 07/19

Force Feed Lube Blow-Out Fittings, Rupture Disks, and Tubing

Force feed lube pump discharge lines require blow-out fittings and the properly rated rupture disk
installed. The disk color should show at the fitting blow-out hole. A system blockage causes pressure
build-up that ruptures the disk. Venting the system through the rupture disk causes the no-flow
shutdown switch to shut down the compressor.
TABLE 3-3 Blow-Out Fittings, Replacement Rupture Disks, & Tubing
Replacement Rupture Disk Standard Tubing

Blow-out Fitting Ariel
P/N Rating psig Ariel Size in. Rating psig
Color Ariel P/N
(barg) P/N (mm) (barg)
A-0080 3250 (224) A-0124 Purple 1/4 x 0.035 5100 PT0200CB

(6.4 x 0.9) (352) (304 SS)
A-3531 3700 (255) A-3536 Yellow wall
A-3532 4600 (317) A-3537 Red
A-3533 5500 (379) A-3538 Orange 1/4 x 0.065 10,200 PT0201CD

(6.4 x 1.7) (703) (316 SS)
A-3534 6400 (441) A-3539 Pink wall
A-3535 7300 (503) A-3540 Blue
Ariel force feed lube blow-out fitting rupture disks are color-coded to identify rupture pressure ratings.
Some disks come with half the finished face coated. If the disk color coating is less than half the face
surface, the color may not show through the small centered blow-out hole when installed in the blow-
out fitting. When this happens, a visual inspection for color coding may not indicate the correct disk is
installed, and fitting disassembly is required to confirm the proper disk installation. To correct this issue
in the future, the finished face of rupture disks supplied to Ariel after March 2005 are completely coated
with color. Disks need not be replaced because of this change and existing disk stock may be used-up.
CAUTION: Use a mirror to inspect rupture disk color if force feed lube system is
pressurized. A rupturing disk or high pressure oil can potentially cause personal injury.
When installing a rupture disk, tighten the blow-out hex fitting cap to 40 lb. x in. (4.5 N•m) torque. Do not
over tighten cap or blow-out pressure may decrease, which may increase nuisance shutdowns.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-27 of 37

Distribution Blocks
Distribution blocks consist of three to
seven divider valves and an optional
bypass block fastened to a segmented
baseplate. Viton O-rings (90
Durometer) seal between the divider
valves and baseplate and between
baseplate segments. Check valves are
installed at all lube port outlets.
Divider valves contain metering pistons
that discharge a predetermined
amount of oil with each cycle in a single
line, progressive lubrication system.
NOTE: Pistons are matched to a
specific divider valve. Do not try to
place a different piston into a
divider valve.
Single or twin valves may be externally
singled or cross-ported. Plug unused
outlets when singling or cross-porting.
Bypass blocks can replace a divider
valve section to eliminate the
1. Piston 7. Intermediate 9. End Block
lubrication points. Plug both outlets Blocks
2. Crossport Plate 10. Tie Rod Nut
below the bypass block. A bypass block
3. Inlet Port 8. Outlet Port 11. Tie Rod
can mount in any baseplate location, (correct position
but it requires at least three working 4. Inlet Block 12. Divider Valve
5. O-Rings is off-center 13. Valve Screw
divider valves in the block assembly toward inlet
(i.e. bypass blocks cannot be used on 6. Check Valve
block)
3-section baseplates).
FIGURE 3-17 Typical Distribution Block
The baseplate contains the divider
valve inlet and outlet connections,
interrelated passageways, and built-in check valves. All lubricant piping to and from the distribution
block connects to the baseplate. The baseplate consists of one inlet block, three to seven intermediate
blocks, one end block, and three tie rods. The number of baseplate intermediate blocks determines the
number of divider valves allowed. Each distribution block requires a minimum of three divider valves.
Distribution Block Assembly

NOTE: See specific frame Parts Book for available divider valve assembly drawings, parts
lists, and repair kits.
1. Thread three tie rods into inlet block until the ends flush with the top surface of the block.
2. Slide Intermediate blocks onto tie rods. Verify all O-rings are installed and discharge ports are off
center toward the inlet block.
3. Slide end block onto tie rods.
4. Lay base plate assembly on a flat surface. Use "Recommendations for Torque Accuracy" to tighten
the tie rod nuts to the correct torque listed in Appendix A.
Page 3-28 of 37 REV: 07/19

5. Mount the divider valves with O-rings onto the base plate. Use "Recommendations for Torque
Accuracy" to tighten the tie rod nuts to the correct torque listed in Appendix A.
Divider Valve Bypass Pressure Test

Lubricant can leak (by-pass) from a divider valve when the divider valve piston becomes worn.
Pressure test or replace all divider valves every twelve months. Testing verifies the piston fits tightly
enough in the divider valve bore for adequate pressure to force oil into the injection point. The supplier
pressure tests all new Ariel divider valves.
To test distribution blocks for valve by-passing requires a manual purge pump with a pressure gauge
capable of developing 5000 psig (350 barg). Ariel offers an optional force feed lubrication hand purge
pump with a pressure gauge (see Section 1). Pressure test each divider valve one at a time, complete
with pin indicators installed.
FIGURE 3-18 Pressure Testing Divider Valves
1. For new divider valves, verify working piston section fastener torque is 75 lb x in (8.5 N•m). Loosen
the section fasteners, then step-torque them first to 40 lb x in (4.5 N•m), and then to 75 lb x in (8.5
N•m). Used divider valves can be tested “as is”, with approximate section fastener torque verified
after testing.
2. Place the distribution block in an open container with all base outlets open. Connect purge pump
filled with room temperature [65°F (18°C)] 10 wt. (ISO 32) mineral oil to the divider block inlet. Pump
the purge pump to purge air from the divider block assembly. Verify that oil flows freely from all
outlets (see FIGURE 3-18 “Divider Block All Outlets Open”).
Testing with 10 wt. mineral oil at 65°F (18°C) simulates divider block operation at 120°F (49°C) with
40 wt. (ISO 150) mineral oil. If 10 wt. (ISO 32) mineral oil is unavailable, use 40 wt. (ISO 150);
however, the pressure test will be less sensitive in detecting a bypassing divider valve.
3. The divider block assembly should cycle at less than 300 psi (2068 kPa) while purging at a steady
rate. Cycle pressures above 300 psi (2068 kPa) indicate inhibited piston movement, possibly caused
by the piston rubbing the bore, oil contamination, part geometry, or bore distortion due to over-
tightening the section fasteners. If re-torquing the valve section fails to improve cycle pressure,
replace the divider valve section. Do not attempt to alter the piston/bore fit by polishing components.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-29 of 37

4. For divider valves stamped with a “T” (for “twin”), use a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) pipe or tubing plug to plug
only one base outlet when testing that side of the piston, and leave all other outlets open. Plug and
test each base outlet of divider valves stamped with a “T” one side at a time. See FIGURE 3-18
“Testing ‘T’ Divider Valve”. Individual testing of each outlet ensures both sides of the piston build
adequate pressure. For all divider valves stamped with an “S” on the front (for “single”), plug the
working outlet as well to test both sides of the piston for by-passing simultaneously. See FIGURE 3-
18 “Testing ‘S’ Divider Valve”.
5. Pump the purge pump until the pressure gauge indicates 3000 psi (20684 kPa). Hold this pressure
for 5 seconds, then increase it to 3500 psi (24132 kPa). Stop pumping at 3500 psi (24132 kPa).
6. Start timer and monitor the pressure drop from 3500 psi (24132 kPa) for 30 seconds. Check
discharge outlet(s) plug(s) to confirm no external leaks. Also check O-rings for external leakage. If
the valve bypasses rapidly, repeat the test to ensure the bypass wasn’t due to trapped air. New
valves should not exceed a 400 psi (2758 kPa) pressure drop in 30 seconds. Used valves should not
exceed 1000 psi (6895 kPa) pressure drop in 30 seconds. If pressure drops exceed these limits, the
divider valve fails the test.
7. Repeat Steps 4 thru 6 for the remaining outlets on the divider block assembly.
NOTE: Test distribution blocks at higher pressures if the application dictates higher system
operating pressure.
If a divider valve fails, replace it. Discard worn divider valves. If the tested valve passes the test, relieve
the pressure, move the plug to the next outlet, and repeat the test for all divider valves. When all divider
valves either pass this pressure test or are replaced, reassemble the distribution block, purge it with the
proper force feed lubricant, and put it into service.
Ariel recommends periodic tests for proper cylinder bore lubrication rates and/or aftermarket devices
that measure flow.
Balance Valves
Install balance valves on low-pressure lube lines to artificially increase lube line pressure and reduce
differential pressure between lube points downstream of a divider block. Important considerations:
l Set and maintain balance valves downstream of a divider block within 500 psi (3400kPa) of each
other or less. The closer the balance valve set pressures, the more reliable the system.
l Avoid situations in which the balance valve set pressure is the greatest contributor of pressure to the
divider block immediately upstream.
l With a balanced divider block, the upstream divider block pressure gauge should exhibit no erratic
needle movement as the divider block cycles.
To maintain the force feed lube system, record the maximum injection pressure indicated at each divider
block gauge, balance valve set pressures, and divider block cycle time at least once a day for each zone
in the system. See Appendix E.
Do not adjust balance valves prior to operating the unit. Verify the tightness of all fittings and fix any
known leaks. To remove any trapped air or gas in the force feed lube system, use a high-pressure hand
purge pump and the same oil recommended for the cylinder application to purge it. DO NOT USE ANY
OTHER FLUIDS FOR PURGING! Call the Ariel Response Center for details about purchasing a hand
purge pump. To prepare for balance valve adjustment:
Page 3-30 of 37 REV: 07/19

1. Start the compressor and bring the cylinders up to normal operating pressure.
2. Allow operating pressures to stabilize.
3. See the cylinder lube sheets for balance valve locations and proper spring type for each device.
Adjustment of Balance Valves Fed by a Divider Block

1. Select one divider block that feeds one or
more balance valves nearest the compressor
cylinder/packing.
2. For each balance valve downstream of the
selected divider block, loosen the balance
valve lock nut and rotate the adjustment cap
counter-clockwise until the cap is loose. Some
residual pressure may remain on the balance
valve gauge.
3. Monitor the selected divider block gauge for
one minute and record the minimum and 1. Balance Valve 4. Lock Nut
maximum pressures in Appendix E. 2. Balance Valve 5. Divider Block Pressure
Pressure Gauge Gauge
4. Calculate the balance valve set pressure by
3. Adjustment Cap 6. Divider Block
multiplying the maximum recorded pressure
by 0.85. FIGURE 3-19 Balance Valves Fed by Divider Block
5. Set balance valve(s) downstream of the

selected divider block to the pressure
calculated in step 4 by rotating the adjustment cap clockwise to increase pressure. Set pressure
within ±50 psi (3.5 bar) of the calculated value.
6. Monitor the divider block gauge for one minute and record the minimum and maximum pressures in
Appendix E. The difference between the minimum and maximum should not exceed 1200 psig (82.7
barg). If it does, repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Tighten the balance valve lock nut. DO NOT lock wire the adjustment cap.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for any remaining divider block that feeds one or more balance valves
nearest the compressor cylinder/packing.
9. After setting all balance valves in the force feed system, operate the system for 4 to 6 hours, then
repeat step 6 for each divider block.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-31 of 37

Adjustment of Balance Valves Fed by Primary/Secondary Divider Blocks
NOTE: Set secondary balance

valves before setting primary
balance valves. If the system
contains no secondary balance
valves downstream of a secondary
divider block, proceed to step 4.
1. Select one secondary divider block
that feeds one or more secondary
balance valves nearest the
compressor cylinder/packing.
2. For the selected secondary divider
block and secondary balance
valves, perform steps 2 through 7 in
"Adjustment of Balance Valves Fed
by a Divider Block" above.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any
remaining secondary divider blocks
that feed one or more secondary
balance valves nearest the
compressor cylinder/packing.
1. Primary Balance 5. Primary Divider 8. Secondary
4. Select one primary divider block that Valve Block Pressure Divider Block
feeds one or more primary balance 2. Primary Balance Gauge 9. Secondary
valves located prior to a secondary Valve Pressure 6. Primary Divider Balance Valve
divider block or lube point. Gauge Block 10. Secondary
3. Adjustment Cap 7. Secondary Balance Valve
5. For the selected primary divider 4. Lock Nut Divider Pressure Gauge
block and balance valves, perform Block Pressure
steps 2 through 7 in "Adjustment of Gauge
Balance Valves Fed by a Divider
FIGURE 3-20 Primary/Secondary Divider Block System
Block" above.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any remaining primary divider block that feeds one or more balance valves
located prior to a secondary divider block or lube point.
7. After setting all balance valves in the force feed system, operate the system for 4 to 6 hours, then
repeat steps 3 through 7 in "Adjustment of Balance Valves Fed by a Divider Block" above for each
primary or secondary divider block.
Subsequent Compressor Start-Up TABLE 3-4 Balance Valve Part Numbers
1. Verify tightness of all fittings and fix any known Description Ariel Part No.
leaks. Purge force feed lube system.
Balance Valve without Spring CA-8005
Balance Valve Springs See ER-57.1
Balance Valve Seal Repair Kit A-8005-K
Balance Valve Plug A-10330
Pressure Gauges See ER-57.1
Page 3-32 of 37 REV: 07/19

2. If the force feed lube system has been disassembled or parts replaced since the last start-up, purge
the force feed lube system with a high-pressure hand purge pump. When purging the system, use
the same oil that is recommended for the cylinder application, to remove any trapped air or gas in the
system. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUIDS FOR PURGING! Call the Ariel Response Center for
details about purchasing a hand purge pump.
3. Start the compressor and bring up to normal operating pressure.
4. Operate the unit for 2 to 3 hours to allow the operating pressures to stabilize. DO NOT adjust the
balancing valves immediately after start-up. It is possible that some lube point injection pressures will
fluctuate after a short period of run time and the system pressures will stabilize as components
increase in temperature.
5. See the cylinder lube sheets for balance valve locations and proper spring type for each device.
6. Select one divider block that feeds one or more balance valves.
7. Monitor the selected divider block gauge for one minute and record the minimum and maximum
pressures in Appendix E.
8. See ER-57.1 if any of the conditions below occur:
a. The difference between the maximum and minimum recorded divider block pressures exceeds
1200 psig (82.7 barg).
b. The maximum recorded balance valve pressure exceeds 85% of the maximum recorded divider
block pressure.
c. The divider block gauge exhibits erratic needle movement as the divider block cycles.
DO NOT RUN UNIT WITH LEAKING BALANCE VALVES. Ariel offers a balance valve seal repair
kit - Part No. A-8005-K.
To maintain the force feed lube system, record maximum injection pressure indicated at the divider
block gauge, balance valve set pressure, and divider block cycle time at least once a day for each zone
in the lube system.
Force Feed System Design, Operating Parameters,

and Conditions
See specific packager data to confirm designed gas composition, operating pressures, and speed. If
operating outside design conditions, system may need to be reviewed. To optimize force-feed
lubrication system operation, Ariel uses these general guidelines:
1. Maintain lube rates within prescribed limits and cycle times as low as possible (normally 10 sec
minimum) to lubricate each point as frequently as possible.
2. Multiple pumps may be manifolded to achieve required lubrication rates.
3. Do not operate pumps below 20% of full stroke or they become inconsistent. When two or more
pumps are manifolded to feed one distribution block, adjust them equally. Start with pumps wide
open, and adjust them together so that when break-in cycle time is set, the pumps stroke about the
same. After break-in period, adjust the pumps in the same manner, provided the final pump stroke is
not too short. Try to keep the stroke greater than 20% of maximum; a shorter stroke produces
unreliable pump output. If needed, close one pump to stop its flow and open the other(s) to make the
“normal” cycle time, and maintain a stroke greater than 20% in the functioning pump(s).
REV: 07/19 Page 3-33 of 37

4. In some applications, one divider valve delivers lubrication to both a packing and a cylinder to
optimize lubrication system operation. In some applications, cross-ported divider valves deliver the
proper proportion of lubricant to a given point.
5. During operation, verify oil fills the lubricator reservoir TABLE 3-5 Force Feed Lubricator
sight glass to the overflow line. Reservoir oil lubricates the Reservoir Oil Capacity
worm gear and cam; it does not flow through the system.
Lubricator Type US Gallons
The reservoir also catches force feed lube pump leakage.
Ariel Designs (Liters)
Add oil only if needed to raise reservoir oil level.
Single Pump 0.25 (1)
6. Ariel primes the force feed system with mineral oil. If
tubing is missing, or if the system is drained, fill and prime Dual Pump 0.5 (1.75)
the system through a 1/8 inch plug on the discharge end of
the force feed lubricator pump. Four Pump 0.8 (3)
7. Prime the force feed lubrication system with a proper

priming pump just prior to starting the compressor (see FIGURE 1-2 for pump illustration). Use
clean force feed lubricating oil of same type and grade as used in service. Do not use any other fluid
type or grade to prime.
8. For recently overhauled units, adjust force feed cycle time for maximum delivery. Loosen adjusting
screw locknut. Turn plunger stroke adjustment screw to the full up position. Tighten adjusting screw
locknut. After two hours of operation or before leaving site, reset to “normal” cycle time.
Common Oil Supply

FIGURE 3-21 shows the force feed lube system installation when compressor frame lube oil is also
used for cylinder and packing lubrication.
1. Frame Oil Gallery

2. Single Ball Check Valve
3. Sintered Bronze Filter (if applicable)
4. Force Feed Lubricator Pump
5. ARV or Rupture Disk
6. Pressure Gauge
7. Divider Valves/Distribution Block
8. Fluid Flow Monitor No-Flow Timer
Shutdown Switch
9. Double Ball Check Valve
10. Top Cylinder Injection Point
11. Bottom Cylinder Injection Point
12. Packing Injection Point
FIGURE 3-21 Force Feed

Lubrication System Common
Oil Supply
Page 3-34 of 37 REV: 07/19

Independent Oil Supply

When cylinders and packing require oil
different from frame oil, the force feed
lubricator system requires an
independent oil supply system (see
FIGURE 3-22). An elevated tank must
supply pressurized force feed lube oil at
a minimum of 1 psig (0.07 barg) to the
force feed pump inlet manifold.
To prevent force feed oil from
contaminating compressor frame oil,
disconnect lubricator box overflow
tubing from compressor frame and
direct it to a suitable drain system.
Independent force feed lube systems
require oil with a viscosity below 1100
cSt at the lubricator pump inlet (e.g.
ISO 320 at 73°F (23°C), contact lube
supplier about specific lubricants). FIGURE 3-22 Force Feed Lubrication
Possible ways to ensure force feed System Independent Oil Supply
pump is fed oil during suction stroke:
l Increase pipe and fitting size from tank to force feed pump.
l Heat the oil.
l Heat trace and insulate the line from the tank.
l Pressurize the supply tank (tank must be designed for pressure).
Force Feed Lubrication Conditions

CAUTION: To prevent personal injury, verify driver or compressor cylinder gas
pressure cannot turn compressor crankshaft during maintenance. Before any
maintenance or component removal, relieve all pressure from compressor cylinders.
See Packager’s instructions to completely vent the system. After maintenance, purge
the entire system with gas prior to operation to avoid a potentially explosive air/gas
mixture.
Cycle Time
Lubricant flow rates are measured in seconds per cycle of the distribution block. The calculated break-in
and normal cycle times are stamped on the lubricator box data plate. These cycle times are calculated
based on the gas analysis, operating conditions, and applied speed specified in the compressor order. If
gas conditions were not supplied with the compressor order, the data plate/lube sheet rates default to
clean, dry, 0.65 specific gravity, sweet gas and cylinder MAWP. If the applied speed is not specified, the
cycle time is based on maximum rated speed of the frame or cylinders, whichever is less. The lube
sheets in the Ariel Parts Book state gas conditions and list the base rate multiplier at each lube point.
Break-in Rate - Set the break-in lube rate about twice the recommended daily rate (150% minimum);
i.e. set the break-in cycle time about half the normal cycle time (67% max.) to increase lube rate.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-35 of 37

Maintain break-in rate for 200 hours of operation for new equipment. Contact Ariel if existing pump is
incapable of minimum flow rate required.
Lube Rate and Speed - Recommended lube rates for break-in or normal operation, in seconds per
cycle, are calculated at the frame rated speed (RPM) stamped on the frame data plate or the cylinder
rated RPM stamped on the cylinder data plate, whichever is lower. Lube rate decreases with speed, (as
compressor actual running speed decreases, cycle time increases, reducing lube rate):
(RPMmax ÷ RPMactual) x cycle time seconds from lube plate = cycle time seconds at actual running speed.
See the Ariel Parts Book Lubrication Sheets for the Cycle Time (seconds) vs. RPM (compressor speed)
table at various running speeds at stated gas operating conditions and lubricant.
Adjusting the cycle time changes the lubrication rate for all the compressor cylinders and packings
supplied by a particular pump. To change the lubrication rate for only one cylinder or packing requires
individual divider valve changes. Contact your packager or Ariel for information.
To set proper force-feed lubricator pump flow rate, read or measure the cycle time from the installed
device. For a magnetic cycle indicator assembly, time the cycle from initial indicator pin movement at the
fully retracted position to the time when the pin returns to the fully retracted position and just begins
initial movement out again. Adjust the lubricator pump to provide the required cycle time.
NOTE: Pump output can become inconsistent if flow rate is set too low. See “Force Feed
System Design, Operating Parameters, and Conditions” on page 3-33
Changes in operating conditions (such as gas properties or pressures, temperatures, flow
requirements, or cylinder re-configuration) require lubrication rate re-calculation and possible force-
feed lubrication system alteration. Consult the Ariel Packager Standards, the Packager, and/or Ariel.
Under/Over Lube
Inadequate lubrication causes premature wear of piston and packing ring materials. Indications of under
lubrication are black, gummy deposits in the distance piece, packing case, cylinder, and valves. When
symptoms indicate under lubrication:
l Verify proper operation of force feed lubricator pumps.
l Confirm distribution block cycle time matches the lube sheet or force feed lubricator data plate.
l Verify all tubing and fitting tightness; check for leakage. Check fittings inside cylinder gas passages.
l Pressure test or replace divider valves to ensure they do not bypass.
Over lubrication can result in excessive oil carryover into the gas stream, and increased valve and gas
passage deposits. Valve plate breakage and packing failure may also indicate over-lubrication.
Cylinder Lubrication Paper Test

1. Remove head end head and position piston for the desired cylinder at inner dead center.
2. Using light pressure, wipe the cylinder bore with two layers of regular unwaxed cigarette paper
together. Begin at the top and wipe downward about 20° along the bore circumference. The paper
against the bore surface should be stained (wetted with oil), but the second paper should not be
soaked through.
Page 3-36 of 37 REV: 07/19

3. Repeat the test at both sides of the bore at about 90° from the top, using two clean papers for each
side. Paper against the bore surface not stained through may indicate under-lubrication; both
papers stained through may indicate over-lubrication. In either case, Ariel normally recommends
changing lubrication rate accordingly and repeating all paper tests until passed.
4. Repeat this procedure for all cylinders. If the test indicates a lubrication rate reduction or increase for
a cylinder, change in 5% increments by adjusting cycle time at the force feed lube pump (see “Pump
Adjustment” on page 3-25). Repeat oil film testing, for affected cylinders, after 24 hours of operation.
For a formal lube rate reduction program, see Ariel ER-125.
NOTE: The paper test indicates only oil film quantity. Aftermarket devices exist that
measure flow. Neither method indicates viscosity quality. Oils diluted with water,
hydrocarbons, or other constituents may appear to produce an adequate film or flow, but
dilution will reduce lubricant effectiveness below requirements.
Coolant System Requirements

Coolant flow = number of packing cases x 1 US PI = Pressure Indicator FI = Flow Indicator
gallon per minute (gpm), minimum for each inch
TI = Temperature LG = Level Gauge
of piston rod diameter (No. cases x 0.149 l/min for Indicator
each mm of piston rod diameter). Based on using
a solution of 50/50 treated water/glycol solution.
See FIGURE 3-23.
Example: JGK/2 with 2.0 inch (50.8 mm)
diameter piston rod.
2 packing cases x 1 gpm per inch of rod diameter
x 2.0 inch rod diameter = 4 gpm
(2 packing cases x 0.149 l/min per mm of rod
diameter x 50.8 mm rod diameter = 15.1 l/min)
Cooler size = number of cases x 70
BTU/minute/inch of rod diameter (number of
cases x 0.05 kW/mm of rod diameter). Pressure
drop depends on several factors including flow
rate and fluid, but should generally be at least 10-
30 psi (0.7-2.1 bar). Coolant into the packing 1. Packing Case 5. Strainer
must not exceed 130°F maximum (54°C max.). 2. Throttling Valve 6. Water Pump
Lower coolant temperature increases heat 3. Isolation Valve 7. Cooler
transfer from the packing and may be required in 4. Surge Tank 8. Thermostatic Valve
high-pressure applications.
FIGURE 3-23 Typical Packing Cooling System
Coolant inlet pressure should be at least 40-80
psi (2.8-5.5 bar). 300 psi (20.7 bar) is the
maximum to preserve the o-ring seal between the
cups.
REV: 07/19 Page 3-37 of 37

Section 4 - Part Replacement
Major frame assembly components include the crankcase, crankshaft and bearings, connecting rods,
chain drive system, and crossheads, and guides/distance pieces. Removable end covers, an aluminum
top cover, and crosshead guide side covers provide easy access to internal components. Below are
general guidelines to follow during maintenance.
1. Cleanliness during part replacement:
l Use lint-free wiping cloths.
l When not working on a frame with access covers removed, cover it to protect the interior from
rain, dust, and other airborne debris.
l Place removed components in a safe place away from work area to prevent damage. Take
precautions to keep parts from rusting.
2. Gasket maintenance:
l When dismantling the machine, carefully inspect gaskets at non-pressure locations. If damaged,
replace them.
l Always replace pressure-retaining gaskets.
l Always apply an anti-seize lubricant to both sides of metallic gaskets.
3. For major overhauls, drain and flush the crankcase.
If replacing a connecting rod assembly, piston, piston and rod assembly, crosshead-balance nuts, or
crosshead, weigh component parts and compare to the Compressor Balancing Record included in the
parts manual with each compressor. If there are weight changes, recalculate opposing throw
reciprocating weight differential. See “Opposed Throw - Reciprocating Weight Balancing” on page C-5
for assistance. After maintenance, purge the entire system with gas prior to operation
to avoid a potentially explosive air/gas mixture.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Section 4 - Part Replacement
Positioning a Throw
Component replacement often requires manually turning the crankshaft to position a throw in one of two
positions: inner dead center or outer dead center. During normal operation, crossheads slide back and
forth in the crosshead guides. In the inner dead center position, the crossheads slide toward the
crankcase as far as possible. In the outer dead center position, the crossheads slide away from the
crankcase as far as possible (see figure below). Some procedures require a dial indicator with magnetic
base to locate the precise inner or outer dead center. At other times, a procedure may require turning
the crankshaft so a throw occupies its highest or lowest position. In the figure below, the throw on the
left is in its highest position and the throw on the right is in its lowest position.
FIGURE 4-1 Throw Positioning
Variable Volume Clearance Pocket (VVCP)

A VVCP changes the clearance volume of the head end of a cylinder. The amount of clearance
depends on the position of the clearance pocket piston. Users turn the piston/stem assembly
counterclockwise to increase clearance, and clockwise to decrease it. In the event that gas begins to
leak from the VVCP vent, replace the V-packing or seal within the VVCP.
VVCP Removal
CAUTION: Completely vent the cylinder before VVCP removal. Attempting to remove
the VVCP without venting may result in equipment damage, personal injury, or death.
1. After venting the cylinder, loosen

the locking handle so the 1. Cylinder
adjustment handle can turn freely.
2. Eyebolt
Turn the adjustment handle.
3. VVCP Vent
4. Locking Handle
5. Adjustment
Handle
6. Flange Bolts
7. Bellows Thread
Protector
FIGURE 4-2
Typical VVCP
Page 4-2 of 55 REV: 07/19

Section 4 - Part Replacement For models JGH:E:K:T
CAUTION: A hard to turn adjustment handle or piston stem may indicate pressurized
gas trapped within the VVCP. See VVCP Disassembly caution below.
2. Tighten the locking handle.

3. Disconnect the VVCP vent.
4. Remove plastic plug from eyebolt hole and thread an eyebolt into the eyebolt hole.
5. Use the Ariel supplied eyebolt to support the weight of the VVCP.
6. Remove all flange bolts and slide the VVCP out from the cylinder. The Ariel Performance Program
contains approximate VVCP weights.
If the VVCP does not slide out easily, loosen the valve cap bolts. If it still does not slide out easily:
a. Remove head end valves.
b. Clean the area between the VVCP head and the cylinder.
c. Loosen discharge bottle supports.
7. Discard the head gasket and transport the VVCP to a suitable work area for disassembly.
VVCP Disassembly
The VVCP piston ring is not gas-tight to allow a nearly balanced gas pressure, which eases VVCP
adjustment with the cylinder pressurized. Gas pressure behind the VVCP piston normally vents when
the cylinder vents. Process debris or rust around the piston ring can form a seal that traps gas within the
VVCP assembly, sometimes at substantial pressure.
CAUTION: Trapped gas pressure can present a personal safety hazard when servicing
the VVCP. Work in a well-ventilated, non-sparking area, particularly with sour gas
applications. Do not breathe gas emission from VVCP when venting trapped gas.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-3 of 55

1. Locknut 6. Grease Fitting 12. Piston 18. Compression Spring

2. Adjustment Handle 7. Adapter 13. Piston Ring 19. Backup Ring
3. Adjustment Handle 8. Match Mark 14. O-Ring (see Note 2) 20. V-Packing or Seal
Lip 9. Piston Stem 15. Retaining Plate 21. Seal
4. Bellows Thread 10. Socket Head Bolt 16. Snap Ring 22. Seal Carrier
Protector 11. Head 17. Spring Retainer 23. O-Ring
5. Locking Handle
FIGURE 4-3 VVCP Disassembly/Assembly
1. Place the VVCP on a table, adapter up.
2. The bellows thread protector grips a lip on the adjustment handle. Use pliers to pull the bellows from
the adjustment handle lip. Do not tear the bellows.
3. Remove locknut.
4. Remove adjustment handle. The adjustment handle is a tapered fit onto the piston stem; use a soft
hammer or puller to break the fit.
5. Thread the locking handle off of the piston stem. Leave the bellows thread protector attached to the
locking handle.
6. Depending on size, a VVCP may have two to four socket head bolts. Use a marker to draw match
marks on the side of the VVCP where the adapter and head join at each socket head bolt location.
Loosen the socket head bolts evenly and incrementally to release any potentially high-pressure gas.
Do not breathe gas emission from VVCP.
7. Remove socket head bolts and turn the adapter counterclockwise to thread it off of the piston stem.
Place adapter flange up next to the head.
Page 4-4 of 55 REV: 07/19

8. Remove the piston stem and piston assembly from the head. The piston stem and piston are
permanently joined; do not attempt to disassemble them.
9. Remove the piston ring from the piston.
10. Depending on VVCP size, Ariel machines a groove for the o-ring into either the face of the head or
the base of the adapter. Remove and discard the o-ring.
NOTE: Steps 11-13 apply only to VVCP's with a V-packing seal.

11. Some adapters use a bolted retaining plate while others
use a snap ring and spring retainer:
a. Retaining Plate - Remove retaining plate bolts and
retaining plate.
b. Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
l Thread a nut onto a threaded rod that is a few
inches longer than the adapter height.
l Slide a washer wider than the main bore of the
adapter down to the nut.
l Insert the threaded rod end with no nut into the
main bore of the adapter until it protrudes from the
base of the adapter.
1. Washer 5. Backup Ring
l Slide a washer wide enough to overlap spring
retainer but less wide than the snap ring onto the 2. Snap Ring 6. Spring Retainer
protruding threaded rod. 3. Threaded Rod 7. Compression
Spring
l Thread a nut onto the threaded rod protruding from 4. Nut
the base. Tighten nut until compression spring 8. V-Packing or
compresses enough to separate spring retainer Seal
from snap ring. FIGURE 4-4 Spring Compression for
Snap Ring Removal
l Use snap ring pliers to remove snap ring.
l Remove nut from threaded rod. Remove threaded
rod and washers from adapter main bore.
12. Remove spring retainer, compression spring, and backup ring from the adapter counterbore.
13. Remove V-packing or seal from adapter counterbore. Find a strong, foot-long metal 3/16 inch rod or
pipe and bend about .75 inch at 90°. Insert the rod into the adapter counterbore and slide the .75
inch beneath the V-packing or seal. Pull up on the rod or pipe to pull the V-packing or seal from the
adapter counterbore.
NOTE: Steps 14-15 apply only to VVCP's with a spring energized seal.
14. Using an appropriate puller tool, remove the first seal from the seal carrier bore. Be careful not to
damage the seal housing surfaces.
15. Remove the four socket head bolts, seal carrier, and second seal from the adapter bore. Remove
the O-ring from the seal carrier.
VVCP Reassembly
Clean all VVCP parts of all debris, rust, etc. Replace worn or damaged parts.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-5 of 55

1. With flange up, place the head on a table. With flange up, place the adapter beside the head.
2. Depending on VVCP size, Ariel machines a groove for the O-ring into either the face of the head or
the base of adapter. Oil and insert a new O-ring into O-ring groove.
3. Install the piston ring onto the piston.
4. Oil the head bore, then insert stem and piston assembly into the head cavity.
NOTE: Steps 5-9 apply only to VVCP's with a V-packing seal.

5. Oil the adapter counterbore and insert V-packing or seal. The V-packing or seal consists of five
partitions; insert V-packing or seal into the counterbore with the thickest partition down and the
thinnest partition up.
NOTE: When properly installed, a V-packing gives resistance when the stem is inserted. If
there is no resistance, remove the stem and use a solid cylinder of wood or metal to tap
the V-packing or seal two or three times into the counterbore to ensure proper seating.
6. Insert backup ring into adapter counterbore.
7. Insert compression spring into adapter counterbore.
8. Place spring retainer on top of the compression spring.
9. Some adapters use a bolted retaining plate while others use a snap ring and spring retainer:
a. Retaining Plate - Place the retaining plate on top of the spring retainer and press down to
compress the compression spring. Install retaining plate bolts through the retaining plate and into
the adapter. Tighten the retaining plate bolts hand tight.
b. Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
l Compress the compression spring (see FIGURE 4-4).
l Use snap ring pliers to install the snap ring above the spring retainer.
l Remove the nut from the threaded rod, then remove the threaded rod and washers from the
main bore of the adapter.
NOTE: Steps 10-12 apply only to VVCP's with a spring energized seal.
10. Lightly oil and install a new seal in the VVCP adapter bore with the spring facing up. Lightly oil and
install a new O-ring on the seal carrier.
11. Install the seal carrier in the VVCP adapter, tightening the four socket-head bolts hand tight.
12. Lightly oil and install a new seal in the seal carrier with the spring facing up.
13. Grease piston stem threads and install adapter onto piston stem. Install adapter as far as possible on
the piston stem, then turn the adapter counter-clockwise to align the socket head bolt match marks
on the adapter flange with the match marks on the head.
14. Install the socket head bolts. Tighten socket head bolts hand tight.
15. Install locking handle onto the piston stem, but do not lock it. Assemble the locking handle with the
bellows thread protector facing up.
16. Slide the adjustment handle onto the piston stem and use a soft hammer to ensure full engagement
of the tapered fit.
Page 4-6 of 55 REV: 07/19

17. Use the adjustment handle to turn the piston stem counter-clockwise to tighten the seal between the
adapter and head, then lock the locking handle.
18. Install the locknut onto the piston stem and tighten it to prevent the adjustment handle from
loosening.
19. Slide thread protector bellows onto the adjustment handle lip and verify that it grips securely.
20. Apply 3-4 pumps of all-purpose petroleum grease with a grease pump at the grease fitting.
VVCP Installation
Install the VVCP prior to installing valves and torqueing
valve caps. Use the Ariel supplied eyebolt to support the
weight of the VVCP.
1. Apply an anti-sieze lubricant to both the new head
gasket and the cylinder seating surface. Stick the new
head gasket to the cylinder seating surface.
2. Slide the VVCP into the cylinder and align the adapter
flange bolt holes with the cylinder bolt holes.
3. Lubricate and torque flange bolts per Appendix A.
1. Cylinder 4. VVCP Vent
4. Reconnect VVCP vent. Verify piston end clearances. 2. Head Gasket 5. Flange Bolts
See Appendix B . 3. Eyebolt
5. Install valves and torque the valve caps. See FIGURE 4-5 VVCP Installation
"Compressor Valves - Removal and Installation".
VVCP Adjustment
Users may change VVCP clearance volume with the compressor running or stopped. The expected
change in compressor flow and absorbed power depends on compression ratio and properties of the
compressed gas. Consult packager instructions regarding where to set the VVCP. Also see the VVCP
data sheet in the Ariel Parts Book. To open VVCP to a desired percentage:
1. Loosen the locking handle so the adjustment handle can turn freely.
2. Find the VVCP dimension plate.
3. Subtract fully closed dimension from fully open
dimension. The Ariel Performance program
also lists these dimensions if the VVCP
dimension plate is missing. FIGURE 4-6 VVCP Dimension Plate
4. Multiply the step 3 result by the desired percentage expressed as a decimal.
5. Add the step 4 result to the fully closed dimension.
6. Turn the adjustment handle until the measurement from the base of the locking handle, when
locked, to the top of the adjustment handle equals the step 5 result.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-7 of 55

Compressor Valves - Removal and Installation

Before servicing any valve, see the correct valve assembly drawing, parts list, and service literature in
the Ariel Parts Book. The cylinder cover sheet in the Ariel Parts Book lists the valve originally supplied
with each cylinder. Changes in operating pressures, temperatures, RPM, or gas composition may
require alternate valve configuration including springing and lift. Contact your Packager and/or Ariel for
help in valve selection.
for assistance. After maintenance, purge the entire system with gas prior to operation to
avoid a potentially explosive air/gas mixture.
Required Tools and Materials

1. Appropriate Ariel parts list
2. Appropriate Ariel Maintenance and Repair manual
3. Calibrated torque wrench with the appropriate range for target values
4. Lubricant specified in Appendix A
5. Appropriate personal protection equipment
6. Bottle brush
7. Pressurized liquid solvent
8. Valve Tool
Page 4-8 of 55 REV: 07/19

Valve Cap Removal

Valve Caps on Cast Iron Cylinders or High-Pressure Caps without Spring
Energized Seals
1. Slightly loosen all cap
screws in steps and
evenly on a valve cap; the
cap should stay in its
original position. If it
pushes outward, STOP!
Completely vent the
cylinder. See Caution
above.
2. After the above safety
checks and with cap
screws still in place but 1. Cap Screw 4. Valve
loosened, pry the valve 2. Valve Cap Retainer 1. Valve Cap 4. Valve Seat
cap out until the O-ring 5. Valve 2. Valve Gasket
3. O-Ring
clears the cylinder to Assembly Retainer 5. Metallic Wire
confirm proper cylinder 6. Valve Seat 3. Valve Gasket
venting. Use a pair of pry Gasket Assembly
bars, one on each side of
FIGURE 4-7 Valve Cap Assembly FIGURE 4-8 High-Pressure Valve
the cap, to remove the Cap Assembly without Spring
for Cast Iron Cylinder
cap. Energized Seal
3. Remove cap screws and
valve cap. Take care to
prevent damage to fasteners.
CAUTION: Valve cap, retainer, and valve may fall out of bottom pockets if not
supported. Support them after cap screw removal to prevent personal injury.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-9 of 55

Valve Cap with Spring Energized

Seal
1. Remove cap nuts from long studs.
2. Slightly loosen all hex nuts on each valve cap
in steps and evenly. With all the nuts loose, the
cap should stay in its original position. If it
pushes out of its own accord, STOP!
Completely vent the cylinder. See Caution
above.
3. After the above safety checks and with hex 1. Hex Nut 6. Valve
nuts still in place but loosened, remove hex 2. Cap Nut 7. Valve Gasket
nuts from short studs.
3. Valve Cap 8. Keeper Bolt
4. Evenly back off hex nuts on long studs while 4. Seal Keeper 9. 2-Piece Wedge Lock
pulling the valve cap from the cylinder. Use a 5. Retainer Washer
pair of pry bars, one on each side of the cap, to 10. Spring Energized Seal
remove the cap. Ensure the spring energized FIGURE 4-9 High-Pressure Valve Cap Assembly
seal completely disengages from the cylinder with Spring Energized Seal
before removing the hex nuts from long studs.
NOTE: Long studs are assembled with

thread locker to eliminate the possibility of the studs backing out of the cylinder while the
hex nut is removed.
5. Remove long stud hex nuts and valve cap.
6. Inspect seal for damage. If undamaged, the spring energized seal is re-usable.
CAUTION: Valve cap, retainer, and/or valve may fall out of bottom pockets if not
supported. Support them carefully after removing hex nuts to prevent personal injury.
Valve Removal
1. With the valve cap removed and the valve retainer still in place, install a valve tool onto the valve
center bolt or threaded washer. See Section 1 for an illustration of the tool.
2. It may be necessary to loosen the plastic thumb screws in the valve retainers. In some cylinder
classes, the discharge valve retainer is held in place with an O-ring - simply pull the retainer out to
remove it.
3. For high pressure applications that use a metallic wire gasket seal under the valve cap, the cylinder
vents upon loosening the cap screws. Use the valve tool to unseat the metallic wire gasket.
4. Remove the valve and retainer together.
5. In most cases, the flat metal gasket remains in the pocket. It is difficult to see. A flashlight and a small
mirror on an adjustable rod are the best tools to see the gasket clearly. On cylinders with horizontal
valves, the gasket may fall into the gas passage. Use a small magnet on a flexible extension rod to
remove gasket from cylinder.
Page 4-10 of 55 REV: 07/19

6. Head end tandem cylinders may require removal of suction and discharge piping and the cylinder
head to access the concentric valve. A concentric valve combines suction and discharge valves in
one assembly.
Valve Installation
1. Coat valve seat gasket with Never
Seez. Either insert it into the valve
pocket or stick it on the valve. In
either case, do not allow the gasket
to fall into the gas passage. Replace
valve seat gaskets anytime a valve
is removed from a cylinder, if the
unit has been in service.
2. Install suction valves only in suction
pockets and discharge valves only
in discharge pockets. The valve
pockets have identification plates.
Install all valves with valve fastener
(s) positioned away from the
cylinder bore (see Item 1, FIGURE
4-10). If a valve is not marked for
suction or discharge, manually
depress the valve plate to verify the
type. Preferably, use a tool softer 1. 12-Point Capscrew (Center 7. Cylinder Bore
than the valve plate material or Bolt) 8. Valve Seat Gasket
exercise care to prevent damage to 2. Threaded Washer 9. Valve Cap Bolt
the plate. A suction valve plate may 3. Valve Retainer 10. Retainer-Keeper
be depressed only from the valve
4. Seat (Thumbscrew)
fastener (bolting) side of the valve; a
5. Guard 11. Valve Cap O-Ring
discharge valve plate may be
6. Valve 12. Valve Cap
depressed only from the side of the
valve that faces the cylinder bore. FIGURE 4-10 Typical Valve Assemblies
3. Use the valve tool to insert the valve

and retainer into the pocket together
(see tools for your compressor model in Section 1 ). Verify the valve seats properly in the pocket.
When installed correctly, the valve rotates freely by hand.
4. Plastic thumbscrews or o-rings hold valve retainers in position in bottom valve pockets. Tighten
thumbscrews just enough to provide friction so retainers and valves in bottom pockets stay in
position during valve cap installation. Do not replace plastic thumbscrews with metal.
5. Lubricate a new O-ring with oil and install it in the groove on the valve cap nose. Some high pressure
cylinders use a soft metallic wire gasket or spring-energized seal in lieu of the O-ring. Continue to
"Valve Cap Installation".
Valve Cap Installation

Depending on the application, Ariel compressor cylinders utilize different styles of valve caps. Cast iron
cylinders utilize valve caps in which an O-ring on the valve cap seals gas within the cylinder. Forged
steel cylinders utilize a valve cap with either a spring-energized seal or a round metallic gasket to seal
gas within the cylinder. The valve cap presses the round metallic gasket into a triangular cross section
during the torque procedure.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-11 of 55

Ensure all threads are clean and free of debris or burrs. Use a bottle brush and pressurized liquid
solvent to clean threaded holes thoroughly. Avoid sending debris into cylinder gas passage. Bolts
should thread into hole and bottom out on the valve cap by hand without resistance or use of a wrench.
If bolts do not thread into hole freely, contact ARC for thread repair instructions.
See Appendix A for critical information on torque accuracy. Valve cap bolt failures can occur if the cap is
torqued improperly. Draw bolting to full torque in even, gradual steps, without bias on one bolt or
cocking the valve cap in the bore. Such bias or cocking can unevenly crush the gasket, which may cause
leakage and/or bolt failure. In correct assemblies with new valves, the distance from the underside of
the cap to the surface of the cylinder is a uniform 1/8 inch (3 mm). The distance is slightly less with re-
worked valves. Proper tightening of gas containment fasteners is critical to ensure safe and reliable
operation.
CAUTION: Severe personal injury and property damage may result from improperly
torqued valve cap bolts. See Appendix A for correct torque and detailed
recommendations.
Valve Caps on Cast Iron Cylinders or High-Pressure Caps without Spring

Energized Seals
1. Install valve assembly (and high clearance spacer, if
applicable), with the valve seat gasket and valve retainer
in the valve pocket. See “Valve Installation” on page 4-
11.
2. For high-pressure valve caps only: Place a new,
round, metallic wire gasket. Always use a new wire
gasket when installing a high-pressure valve cap;
gaskets are not re-useable.
3. Oil and install a new O-ring on the valve cap. Install the
valve cap. 1. Cylinder 3. Metallic Wire
2. Valve Cap Gasket
4. For standard fasteners in iron cylinders, lubricate threads
4. Valve Retainer
and bolt seating surfaces with mineral oil. For stainless
steel fasteners or in steel cylinders, lubricate threads and FIGURE 4-11 Gasket Crush
bolt seating surfaces with Never Seez regular grade. Do
not use Never Seez on standard fasteners. See
Appendix A for correct valve cap bolt torque.
5. For high-pressure applications, the valve cap joint design requires pressing a round metallic wire
gasket into a triangular cross section (see FIGURE 4-11). This requires multiple passes in a
crisscross pattern with the torque wrench. See Appendix A.
Page 4-12 of 55 REV: 07/19

Valve Caps with Spring Energized Seals

1. Install valve assemby with valve 1. Valve Gasket
seat gasket and valve retainer in the 2. Valve
valve pocket. See “Valve 3. Retainer (openings
Installation” on page 4-11. Verify aligned with gas
valve retainer openings are aligned passage)
with the cylinder gas passage. Re- 4. Thumb Screws
tighten thumb screws, if applicable. 5. Roll Pins
6. Seal Keeper
2. Inspect and lightly lubricate spring
7. Spring Energized Seal
energized seal with petroleum oil.
8. Valve Cap
3. Install valve cap so the roll pins 9. Hex nut
engage the clearance slots in the 10. Cap Nut
seal keeper. Be careful not to gouge
FIGURE 4-12 High-
the bore, or distort or damage the Pressure Valve Cap
gasket. Assembly with Spring-
Energized Seal
4. Liberally coat the valve cap stud
threads and hex nut seating surface
with Never-Seez.
5. See Appendix A for correct valve
cap fastener torque.
6. Continue to torque the valve cap at 100% torque value until no bolt movement is observed. Even
minute bolt movement warrants another pass around the valve cap in a crisscross pattern.
7. Tighten cap nuts on long studs, hand wrench tight.
Gas Containment Fastener Torque Checks

Per Section 5 (start-up checklists) and Section 3 (Recommended Maintenance Intervals), Ariel
recommends checking all gas containment fastener torques by the schedule below and including this
schedule in your computerized maintenance management system (CMMS):
1. Prior to start-up
2. 24 hours after start-up
3. 750 hours after start-up
4. Every 8,000 hours after start-up
Per Section 3, re-check any fasteners found loose in any of these intervals after an additional 750
hours. If loosening continues, contact your packager immediately.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-13 of 55

Piston and Rod

CAUTION: To prevent personal injury, verify neither driver nor compressor cylinder gas
pressure can turn the crankshaft during maintenance. Before any maintenance or
component removal, relieve all pressure from compressor cylinders. See packager
information to completely vent the system or call the packager for assistance. Before
removing a cylinder head, back off all cap screws 1/8 inch (3 mm). Verify the head is
loose and the cylinder is completely vented.
Piston Rod Inspection

At the specified recommended maintenance interval, inspect piston rods for damage and excessive
wear.
l For condemning limits, see page 3-7.
Piston and Rod Removal

NOTE: See Section 1 for illustrations of tools mentioned below. For non-lube cylinders, see
Appendix F.
1. Loosen cylinder head bolts. Remove cylinder head and all crosshead guide side covers.
2. Move crosshead to inner dead center. Back off, but do not remove, the crosshead balance nut set
screws. Loosen crosshead balance nut with the special slugging wrench. Use the open end wrench
for hex nuts or the peg wrench for round nuts, or use the separately purchased hydraulic crosshead
balance nut torque tool.
3. In tandem cylinders, where the outboard cylinder bore is smaller than the inboard bore, remove the
outboard cylinder. Support such cylinders during removal and installation, to avoid excessive weight
on the piston and rod assembly that may bend them. See ER-118 for outboard cylinders with
removable liners.
4. If the piston uses a wear band, measure piston to cylinder clearance at bottom of piston with a feeler
gauge. See Appendix B for tolerances. If out of tolerance, replace wearband.
5. Move crosshead to outer dead center, then use the piston nut spanner to turn the piston and rod
assembly out of the crosshead. The two dowels on the tool fit the piston nut holes. Remove the
crosshead nut from the piston rod.
6. Slide the piston rod entering sleeve over the piston rod threads. With extreme care, slowly slide
piston rod through packing so as not to damage wiper or packing rings.
7. For one-piece piston rings, slide the piston rod assembly from the cylinder, then carefully remove the
piston rings. For two-piece piston rings (in high pressure applications), slide the piston rod assembly
out of cylinder until a fraction of the first ring clears the cylinder. Hold the first ring in the piston groove
by hand, or use a band for larger sizes, until the ring clears the cylinder, then carefully remove the
ring. This prevents the ring from popping out of the groove and damaging the ring. Remove
succeeding two-piece rings and wear band in the same way. Handle all piston rings carefully with
clean tools and hands to protect them from nicks, marring, and bending. Despite their toughness in
service, some rings are fragile when removed.
Page 4-14 of 55 REV: 07/19

8. The weight of the piston and rod assembly is stamped on the head end. Support the piston either
manually or with a crane as appropriate as it slides from the cylinder bore. The piston rod must
remain parallel with the bore until it leaves the bore completely. Take care not to ding any surfaces.
Piston and Rod Manual Disassembly
CAUTION: Trapped gas pressure in hollow pistons can present a personal safety hazard
when servicing the piston and rod assembly. Work in a well-ventilated, non-sparking
area. Do not breathe gas emitted from pistons when venting trapped gas.
NOTE: Ariel offers a clamping fixture for Clamping

1.125 to 2 inch (29 to 51 mm) diameter Nom. Piston
Force
piston rods. Rod Diameter
Required
Inches (mm)
Ton (kN)
1. Securely bolt clamping fixture to a base to
prevent it from turning with the piston rod. 2 (51) 35 (78)
Place it at a height of about three feet (0.9 m).
2. Verify the clamping fixture saddle where the
clamping ring seats, the clamping ring, and the FIGURE 4-13 Clamping Fixture with Clamping
piston rod are clean, dry, and free of any oil. Rings
Even a small amount of oil can cause the (Ariel P/N D-0961) and Required Clamping Force
piston rod to turn in the fixture during torquing,
and a small amount of debris clamped under
high force can damage a piston rod.
3. Clamp the piston and rod assembly in
an appropriate clamping fixture using
the appropriate clamping ring for the
rod size. Clamp it as close to the collar
as possible without fixture
interference with the piston. Torque
the four fixture cap screws to 344 lb x
ft (466 N•m) to prevent the rod from
turning. The fixture properly holds the
piston rod to prevent damage to the
parts and promote safety during
disassembly and reassembly.
1. Allen Wrench (for 3. Clamping Fixture
4. Remove the setscrews from the piston nut setscrews)
4. Spanner (bolts to piston nut)
piston nut. Use an Allen wrench to
2. Torque Multiplier
force them out by turning them past 5. Torque Wrench
the small lip formed by staking.
FIGURE 4-14 Piston and Rod Clamping Fixture
5. Remove piston nut using piston nut
spanner.
6. After piston nut removal, slip the piston and collar off the end of the piston rod.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-15 of 55

Piston and Rod Manual Reassembly

1. Clean all piston and rod assembly parts thoroughly. Verify piston is internally clean and dry. NOTE:
Any reassembly of used parts requires re-cleaning and re-lubrication of threads and
seating surfaces.
2. Inspect collar (or collar area on rod, when collar is integral and not separable), piston, and piston nut
for nicks, burrs, or scratches. Replace if surfaces are damaged, worn, or galled. Inspect piston ring
grooves. If damaged, or ring groove width is out of tolerance, replace the piston (see Appendix B for
tolerances). Dress surfaces with a fine grit stone as required. Fit collar and nut into piston to verify
the outside diameter fits and turns freely by hand in the piston.
3. Inspect piston rod threads and collar shoulder. Clean, de-burr, and lubricate threads. Install collar
and nut onto piston rod to verify inside diameter fits and rotates freely. Tighten piston nut until piston
threads protrude to verify freedom of thread engagement. Remove nut and collar.
4. Verify the clamping fixture saddle where the clamping ring seats, the clamping ring, and the piston
rod are clean, dry, and free of any oil. Even a small amount of oil can cause the piston rod to turn in
the fixture during torquing, and a small amount of debris clamped under high force can damage a
piston rod.
5. Clamp the piston and rod assembly in an appropriate clamping fixture using the appropriate
clamping ring for the rod size. Clamp it as close to the collar as possible without fixture interference
with the piston. Torque the four fixture cap screws to 344 lb x ft (466 N•m) to prevent the rod from
turning. The fixture properly holds the piston rod to prevent damage to the parts and promote safety
during disassembly and reassembly.
6. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to piston rod shoulder, rod collar locating band, and
collar face in contact with piston, then slide collar onto rod.
7. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to piston rod threads at the piston end, then slide
piston onto rod and collar. NOTE: If one end of the piston is machined 0.002 inch (0.05 mm)
undersize across a 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide band, and the piston has the same number of
piston ring grooves on each side, assemble with the undersize band toward the head end.
For pistons with a different number of piston ring grooves on each side, assemble with
the side of fewer piston ring grooves toward the head end. See FIGURE 4-16.
8. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to piston nut threads and piston mating face. Install
nut and hand tighten to make up the piston rod assembly.
9. Use the piston nut spanner and clamping fixture to torque piston nut to the torque listed in Appendix
A. A torque multiplier may be necessary to achieve required torque. Loosen the piston nut without
disassembling and re-tighten to required torque. Repeating the torque properly seats components
and enhances the integrity of the assembly. NOTE: To calculate torque wrench setting when
using a torque multiplier, divide desired fastener torque by the multiplier actual
mechanical advantage, not design mechanical advantage. Example: A multiplier with a
design mechanical advantage of 4.0, but an actual mechanical advantage of 3.6 requires
442 lb x ft (599 N•m) of applied torque to achieve a 1590 lb x ft (2156 N•m) torque.
10. After tightening, the piston rod should not protrude more than 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) past the piston
face. If it does, contact your packager and/or Ariel.
Page 4-16 of 55 REV: 07/19

11. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to two new Allen set screws.
To install a set screw, tighten it 15° past the Allen wrench yield point. Discard
the deformed Allen wrench, and use a new Allen wrench to tighten the other
set screw in the same way. If Allen wrenches are unavailable, use the torques
in Appendix A.
12. Use a punch within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of set screw threads to deform the
threads and stake set screws in place (see FIGURE 4-15). FIGURE 4-15
Staking a Set Screw
13. Use a calibrated scale to weigh piston rod assembly with piston rings and
wear band. Stamp weight on piston head end. Flatten any raised lips to avoid
clearance measurement errors. Record weight on a new balance sheet and send to Ariel. See
“Opposed Throw - Reciprocating Weight Balancing” on page C-5 for approximate component
weights.
Hydraulic Tensioner Tool

Proper preload is essential for piston nuts. Ariel offers a hydraulic tensioner tool as an option to
assemble and disassemble only JGH:E:K:T piston rod assemblies.
1. Piston Nut (with 2

setscrews)
2. Dowel Drive Pin
3. Tensioner Tool (separately
purchased, not a part of
standard tool box)
4. Puller Screw Threads
5. Spanner Ring
6. 3/4-inch Hex
7. Tool Piston
8. Piston Return Spring
9. Piston Seals
10. Snap Ring
11. Adapter Foot Plate (3
Provided)
FIGURE 4-16 Typical A-24512 Hydraulic Piston Nut Tensioner Tool for JGH:E:K:T Frames
Hydraulic Tensioner Tool Setup

Set up tensioner tool with correct adapter foot plate, dowel drive pins, and puller screw insert for the
particular piston and rod per TABLE 4-1. The tool comes with multiple puller screw inserts, two pairs of
different size dowel drive pins to match each puller screw, and three adapter foot plates. A change in
puller screw size requires a change in dowel drive pins. Puller screws with wrench flats and dowel drive
pins with recessed Allen sockets facilitate removal and installation.
TABLE 4-1 Hydraulic Tensioner Tool A-24512 Setup
REV: 07/19 Page 4-17 of 55

Frame Thread Size Foot Plate Puller Screw Dowel Pin Thread Projection, In.
JGH:E:K:T 7/8-9 A-24533 A-24524 A-24529 15/16
7/8-9 A-24531 A-24524 A-24529 15/16
KBK:T 1"-12 A-24531 A-24525 A-24529 1
JGC:D:F 1"-8 A-24532 A-24526 A-24530 1
Piston & Rod Disassembly with Hydraulic Tensioner Tool
CAUTION: Trapped gas pressure can present a personal safety hazard when
disassembing the piston and rod. Work in a well-ventilated, non-sparking area,
particularly with sour gas applications. Do not breathe gas emission when venting
trapped gas.
1. Remove the two Allen set screws from the piston nut and discard.
2. Clean and lubricate threaded hole in piston rod.
3. Ensure the tool hydraulic cylinder is de-energized and fully
retracted. Use the inspection gauge to verify the puller
screw has the proper projection (see FIGURE 4-17).
4. Position tensioner tool with the two dowels inserted into
the piston nut. Tighten puller screw until tensioner tool is
completely tight against the piston rod assembly, then
back off 1/2 turn. NOTE: The puller screw of the
tensioner tool has a 3/4 inch hex to tighten or
loosen the puller screw.
CAUTION: If tool fails to completely tighten

against piston assembly, STOP. Inspect tool
FIGURE 4-17 Typical Inspection Gauge
to find the cause. Correct the problem and
try again. Configure tool properly.
5. Apply hydraulic pressure to the tensioner tool to stretch piston rod (see Appendix A). Use clean
hydraulic fluid in pump/tool system. Ariel offers an appropriate 10,000 psi manual pump kit for use
with the tool.
CAUTION: Do not overpressure torque tool. It can cause tool failure and/or excessive
piston rod pre-load, which may cause piston rod failure and/or personal injury.
6. Loosen piston rod nut. Turn spanner ring a minimum 1/4 turn with a 1/2" drive breaker bar. Release
hydraulic pressure, remove tensioner tool, and then remove the piston nut. NOTE: Half-inch
square holes are provided on the outside of the tool for breaker bar/reaction bar. The
puller screw 3/4" hex can also be used for a reaction bar.
Page 4-18 of 55 REV: 07/19

Piston & Rod Reassembly with Hydraulic Tensioner Tool

1. Clean all piston and rod assembly parts thoroughly. Verify piston is internally clean and dry. NOTE:
Any reassembly of used parts requires re-cleaning and re-lubrication of threads and
seating surfaces.
2. Inspect collar (or collar area on rod, when collar is integral and not separable), piston, and piston nut
for nicks, burrs, or scratches. Replace if surfaces are damaged, worn, or galled. Inspect piston ring
grooves. If damaged, or ring groove width is out of tolerance, replace the piston (see Appendix B for
tolerances). Dress surfaces with a fine grit stone as required. Fit collar and nut into piston to verify
the outside diameter fits and turns freely by hand in the piston.
3. Inspect piston rod threads and collar shoulder. Clean, de-burr, and lubricate threads. Install collar
and nut onto piston rod to verify inside diameter fits and rotates freely. Tighten piston nut until piston
threads protrude to verify freedom of thread engagement. Remove nut and collar.
4. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to piston rod shoulder, rod collar locating band, and
collar face in contact with piston, then slide collar onto rod.
5. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to piston rod threads at the piston end, then slide
piston onto rod and collar. NOTE: If one end of the piston is machined 0.002 inch (0.05 mm)
undersize across a 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide band, and the piston has the same number of
piston ring grooves on each side, assemble with the undersize band toward the head end.
For pistons with a different number of piston ring grooves on each side, assemble with
the side of fewer piston ring grooves toward the head end. See FIGURE 4-16.
6. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to piston nut threads and piston mating face. Install
nut and hand tighten to make up the piston rod assembly.
7. Mark a line across piston and nut prior to torquing to ensure the nut turns. Ensure the tool hydraulic
cylinder is de-energized and fully retracted. Use the inspection gauge to verify the puller screw has
the proper projection (see FIGURE 4-17). Verify the threaded hole in the piston rod is clean and
oiled.
8. Position tensioner tool with the two dowels inserted into the piston nut. Tighten puller screw until
tensioner tool is completely tight against the piston rod assembly, then back off 1/2 turn.
CAUTION: If tool fails to completely tighten against piston assembly, STOP. Inspect
tool to find the cause. Correct the problem and try again. Configure tool properly.
9. Apply hydraulic pressure listed in Appendix A to tensioner tool to stretch the piston rod. To tighten
piston rod nut, use a calibrated torque wrench to torque the spanner ring to the torque listed in
Appendix A. Keep the torque wrench perpendicular to the tool housing. NOTE: Half-inch square
holes are provided on the outside of the tool for breaker bar/reaction bar. The puller
screw 3/4" hex can also be used for a reaction bar.
CAUTION: Maintain clearance between the torque wrench and the tensioner tool
window opening when torquing spanner ring. Proper seating torque will not be
applied to the spanner ring if the torque wrench hits the window opening.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-19 of 55

CAUTION: Do not overpressure torque tool. It can cause tool failure and/or excessive
piston rod pre-load, which may cause piston rod failure and/or personal injury.
NOTE: Periodically calibrate hydraulic pressure gauges for the required pressure. Use
optional Ariel hydraulic hand pump kit.
10. Release hydraulic pressure. Re-apply hydraulic pressure, use a breaker bar to loosen piston nut
without disassembling, and then re-tighten to the recommended torque. This double-torquing
ensures piston assembly integrity.
11. Release hydraulic pressure and remove tensioner tool. Inspect the piston rod at the end of the
piston; it should not protrude more than 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) past the piston face. The nut should be
flush or recessed. Verify piston nut has turned a minimum of 95° to achieve proper pre-load.
12. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez Regular Grade to two new Allen set screws.
To install a set screw, tighten it 15° past the Allen wrench yield point. Discard
the deformed Allen wrench, and use a new Allen wrench to tighten the other
set screw in the same way. If Allen wrenches are unavailable, use the torques
in Appendix A.
13. Use a punch within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of set screw threads to deform the
threads and stake set screws in place (see FIGURE 4-15).
FIGURE 4-18
14. Use a calibrated scale to weigh piston rod assembly with piston rings and wear Staking a Set Screw
band. Stamp weight on piston head end. Flatten any raised lips to avoid
clearance measurement errors. Record weight on a new balance sheet and
send to Ariel. See “Opposed Throw - Reciprocating Weight Balancing” on page C-5 for approximate
component weights.
Piston and Rod Installation

1. Install piston rings in cylinder main bore without piston to measure end gaps. Ariel recommends
replacing piston rings when the end gap equals three times its original specification. See Appendix B
for specification.
2. Except for non-lube cylinders, liberally lubricate the cylinder bore, piston rod, piston rings,
wearbands and piston with compatible cylinder oil. Install rings on piston with ring gaps staggered.
a. For cylinders requiring two-piece piston rings, verify that they are a set by the match marks. Two-
piece rings use dots as match marks -verify the dots face the pressure side of cylinder. Piston
rings are manufactured as matched sets; mixing ring halves may result in incorrect end gaps.
b. For all other rings, see "Piston Rings" below.
3. Slide the piston rod entering sleeve over the piston rod threads. Slide piston rod with piston rings and
wear band into cylinder bore. Damage to the packing rings is likely if an entry sleeve is not used.
4. Using a dial indicator, position the crosshead at the inner dead center position.
5. Verify the balance nut and crosshead mating surfaces are flat and free from dings or other
disparities. If necessary use a flat stone to smooth the surfaces.
Page 4-20 of 55 REV: 07/19

6. Lubricate piston rod and crosshead threads with Never-Seez Regular Grade. Apply a thin coat of oil
to either the balance nut or crosshead mating surface. Do not apply Never-Seez to the mating
surfaces. Install crosshead-balance nut on piston rod. Turn the piston rod into the crosshead.
Visually center the packing flange around the piston rod and torque packing bolts per Appendix A.
7. Set piston end clearance (see Appendix B):
a. Using the piston nut spanner, turn the piston rod into the crosshead.
b. Place a long feeler gauge equal to the crank end clearance required in the crank end top valve
pocket between the piston and the crank end head.
c. Snug piston against the feeler gauge so the feeler gauge cannot be pulled out.
d. Snug the crosshead nut against the crosshead.
e. Tighten the crosshead nut by the slugging method or by hydraulic torquing device. See
“Crosshead Installation” on page 4-36 for hydraulic torquing device.
f. Tighten the balance nut set screws and be sure to remove the piston nut spanner.
8. See “Crosshead Installation” on page 4-36 for details to re-attach piston rod to crosshead, check
piston end clearance, piston rod runout and crosshead clearances, and re-assemble to close
cylinder and crosshead guide. See Appendix B and “Piston Rod Runout” on page 4-22.
CAUTION: Ariel recommends leaving distance piece covers off after any piston rod or
rod packing ring maintenance. Verify no ignition sources exist in the area, pressurize
the unit, and check for gas leaks before distance piece cover installation. This protects
against crosshead guide over-pressure and possible ignition due to incorrect
installation of packing case or components. When checking for leaks, take proper
precautions in process gas applications, such as H2S.
1. Crosshead 3. Set Screw

2. Crosshead Nut 4. Piston Nut Spanner
FIGURE 4-19 Typical Piston and Rod Installation
REV: 07/19 Page 4-21 of 55

Piston Rod Runout TABLE 4-2 JGH:E:K:T Max. Piston

Rod Runout, Inch (mm)a
Check piston rod runout after new unit installation, unit
relocation, or maintenance that may affect rod runout. Vertical 0.0020 (0.051)
Position the stem of a 0.0001 inch (0.001 mm) increment Horizontal 0.0010 (0.025)
calibrated dial indicator against the piston rod, close to the
packing case. Set the indicator to zero with the piston a. Machines with readings falling outside the
limits require disposition by Ariel.
toward the crank end. Bar over crankshaft and record
indicator readings with the piston at mid-stroke and H. E.
positions, in both vertical and horizontal directions. Record upward vertical rod movement as positive
and downward as negative. Record horizontal rod movement toward the auxiliary end of the frame as
positive and toward the drive end as negative. Copy the table below to record readings and compare to
TABLE 4-2 values.
Piston Rod Runout, Inches
Throw 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical Piston @ C. E. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

(0°)
Mid-Stroke
Piston @ H. E.
Horizontal Piston @ C. E. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

(0°)
Mid-Stroke
Piston @ H. E.
If a vertical reading is greater than the maximum acceptable, use this procedure to
determine component acceptability: Break the balance nut loose. Looking from the head end, turn
the piston 90º counter-clockwise, and re-torque the balance nut. Record both vertical and horizontal
readings in the table below. If readings are within 0.0003 inch of the original runout readings above, the
rod is acceptable - break the balance nut loose. Re-set C.E. clearance and re-torque the balance nut. If
rod runout is not within 0.0003 inch of the original reading above, contact Ariel.
Alternate Piston Rod Runout, Inches
Throw 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical Piston @ C. E. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

(90°)
Mid-Stroke
Piston @ H. E.
Horizontal Piston @ C. E. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

(90°)
Mid-Stroke
Piston @ H. E.
Vert. Runout Differencea
Horiz. Runout Differencea

a. Piston @ H. E., original minus alternate.
Page 4-22 of 55 REV: 07/19

Piston Rings
Most cylinders use one-piece angle-cut filled PTFE piston rings. High-pressure cylinders use two-piece
thermoplastic rings. Ariel recommends replacing rings when the end gap increases to three times the
new dimension. To measure end gaps, insert rings in the cylinders without pistons (see Appendix B for
new and maximum end gap dimensions).
Seal-Joint Piston Rings

Seal-joint piston rings are directional and require correct installation. NOTE: On tandem cylinders,
use two seal-joint rings per head end piston assembly; the remainder will be angle cut.
Always position the seal-joint rings next to the wearband.
FIGURE 4-20 Seal-Joint Piston Ring Installation Orientation
High-Pressure Face-Cut Piston Rings

Face-cut piston rings are typically used in cylinders with 2500 psi MAWP or higher, and generally with
notched and fluted wear bands. The rings install with the face cuts toward the highest pressure,
or toward the nearest head. Gas pressure in the wear band area escapes past the piston rings via
the face cuts during the suction stroke to prevent loading the wear band and increase service life. Also,
do not align the ring end gaps; stagger them to minimize gas leakage.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-23 of 55

1. Piston Rod 3. Piston 5. Wear Band 7. Notches

2. Crank End 4. Piston Rings 6. Head End 8. Staggered End Gaps
FIGURE 4-21 High-Pressure Face-Cut Piston Ring Orientation
Three-Piece Piston Rings

This ring style consists of two “outer” rings installed over an
“inner” ring. The first outer ring has double match marks and
the second outer ring has single match marks. The inner
ring rests in the bottom of the piston ring groove; install with
expander chamfer facing the nearest head or highest
pressure (see FIGURE 4-22). Install outer rings with match
marks facing the nearest head or highest pressure and end
gaps staggered to prevent leakage.
Five-Piece Piston Rings

A five-piece ring set consists of two outer rings cut in half
and an inner ring with a single cut. In the five-piece design, FIGURE 4-22 Three-Piece Piston Ring
Ariel uses two different styles: face-cut (notched) and non- Installation Orientation
face-cut. Ring orientation is critical to proper function.
Face-Cut (Notched) Rings: When the inner ring is chamfered, the chamfer faces the nearest head or
highest pressure. The first outer ring has no face-cut (notch) and double match marks, and the second
outer ring has a face-cut (notch) and single match marks. Install both outer rings with match marks
facing the nearest head or highest pressure. When the match marks are correct, the end gaps of the
outer rings do not align.
Non-Face-Cut Rings: When the inner ring is chamfered, the chamfer faces the nearest head or
highest pressure. The first outer ring has double match marks and the second outer ring has single
match marks. Install both outer rings with match marks facing the nearest head or highest pressure.
When the match marks are correct, the end gaps of the outer rings do not align.
Page 4-24 of 55 REV: 07/19

1. First Outer Ring 3. Double Match Marks 5. Chamfer 6. Single Match Marks
2. Second Outer Ring 4. Inner Ring (where applicable) 7. Face-Cut
FIGURE 4-23 Five-Piece Piston Ring Installation Orientation
Wear Bands
Most pistons use a single, one-piece angle-cut filled PTFE wear band. High-pressure cylinders use
two-piece thermoplastic wear bands (see FIGURE 4-21 ).
Since wear bands do not work as sealing rings, end gap is not critical. Wear band projection beyond the
outer piston diameter is important. To check wear band projection, measure piston to cylinder bore
clearance at the bottom of the bore. There is no need to remove the piston from the cylinder. Replace
wear band before it wears enough to allow the piston to touch the cylinder bore.
Piston Rod Packing

The piston rod packing prevents gas from entering the crosshead guide. Piston rod rings within the
packing wear over time and need replacement.
Piston Rod Packing Removal

1. Remove piston and piston rod. See “Piston and Rod Removal” on page 4-14.
2. Remove packing diaphragm (if applicable) and oil wiper packing.
3. Disconnect all tubing and instrumentation (if applicable) from packing flange. Ensure there is no
debris in the tubing between the check valve and packing flange. Remove the twelve-point cap
screws that hold the pressure packing gland to the crank end of the cylinder/head.
4. Typically, the small nuts are not removed from the studs as they hold the packing case together for
removal as an assembly. However, some packings are too big to fit through the distance piece or
crosshead guide doors, so removal of the small nuts and the packing flange is necessary. For certain
longer, higher pressure rating packing cases, knurled nuts hold the remaining packing assembly
together to assist with installation and removal.
5. Remove the pressure packing and take it to a clean place for disassembly.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-25 of 55

6. Set pressure packing on a clean surface on its nose cup or cylinder end. Usually, packing cups are
marked to represent the assembly order starting with the cup closest to the cylinder as number 1. If
the cups are not matchmarked, then match mark the outside diameter of the cups and flange for
proper reassembly. Long tie studs hold the pressure packing together. The stud holes are unequally
spaced to prevent misalignment of the stack of parts. Remove the nuts and unstack the pressure
packing. Replace these nuts each time the pressure packing is serviced.
7. To check ring wear, place assembled rings (note match-marks) on the piston rod. Check end gap
clearance. If the ends butt, or nearly butt, replace the rings. See “Types of Piston Rod Packing
Rings” on page 4-29 for correct ring orientation.
8. Pry loose the metal or spiral-wound gasket on the end cup with a sharp awl. Do not scratch the sides
of the gasket groove. Discard the used gasket.
9. Before reassembly, clean all parts thoroughly.
Piston Rod Packing Reassembly

1. Refer to the pressure packing assembly in your parts book. Ariel supplies parts books with each unit.
Contact your distributor to obtain a parts book. Each pressure packing re-build kit includes a
pressure packing assembly drawing.
2. Take care not to scratch mating surfaces of the cups. Cup surfaces must be clean and dry for re-
assembly.
3. To install a new set of rod rings in an existing packing case, inspect case parts for wear. Cups should
be smooth and flat on the back side where the rod rings must seal. If cups or grooves are concave or
tapered, regrind or relap them. Contact Ariel for appropriate rework thickness dimensions. It is rarely
necessary to alter the crosshead side of cups, but if necessary, take care not to destroy the correct
side clearance for the renewal rings. NOTE: If premature wear is suspected, see “Force Feed
Lubrication Conditions” on page 3-35.
4. Before a packing case installation, disassemble and thoroughly clean it in an appropriate solvent for
the intended service.
5. Verify proper position of each rod ring
and cup and, unless non-lube, coat
rings liberally with new, clean
lubricant before reassembly. Use only
the same lubricant in the force feed
lube system. If non-lube cylinders, see
Appendix F. Ensure tie studs are
completely threaded into end cup.
Examine all parts for unusual nicks or
burrs which may interfere with the
free floating of the rod rings in the
cups. Take particular care with rod
rings made of soft materials, such as
bronze or PTFE. It is extremely
important to handle and install wiper FIGURE 4-24 Piston Rod Packing Case Lube Cups
rings to prevent damage to scraping
edges. If packing case is cooled, see
“Reassembling and Testing Cooled Packing Cases” on page 4-28
Page 4-26 of 55 REV: 07/19

6. Lay out parts on a work bench for progressive installation, with each part in its correct position and
the rod rings with their proper faces toward the pressure. Long tie studs hold the pressure packing
together. The stud holes are unequally spaced to prevent misalignment of the stack of parts. Note
that all rod ring segments are carefully lettered; assemble them accordingly. This is most important
for proper sealing. Center side-loaded WAT and AL rings prior to tightening tie stud nuts. Install tie
stud nuts and tighten to the torques in Appendix A. Manually verify all rings move freely, radially, in
their grooves. Side-loaded rings are snug, but should still move manually. Center these rings.
Packing reassembly:
a. With no gasket installed, install the studs into the end cup (cup # 1).
b. Using cylinder oil, lubricate the cup and the pressure breaker ring or ring set, then install them
into cup (see pressure packing assembly drawing for correct orientation).
c. Install cup # 2 and repeat Step b for the seal ring sets.
d. Repeat steps above for cups #3, #4, etc, until packing case is reassembled per the pressure
packing assembly drawing.
e. Using a clean oil pump filled with cylinder oil, squirt oil into the lube fitting(s). If the packing is
assembled correctly, the oil will come out the lube cup. If not, disassemble the packing and
correct the error.
f. Using pressurized air, repeat the above process for vent and purge lines.
g. For cooled packings the cooling circuit must be pressure tested (see “Testing” on page 4-28).
7. For new installations, carefully clean all accumulated dirt in the lines and compressor. Any foreign
material lodges in the packing and becomes destructively abrasive.
8. Verify the gasket surface in the packing counter bore on the crank end of the cylinder/head is clean
and not scratched. Install a new end cup gasket. Round wire gaskets will fit tightly in the gasket
groove. Spiral-wound or other gasket styles require application of grease (or adhesive for non-lube
applications) to hold them in place.
9. Reinstall complete packing case assembly with oil supply point on top. Use rod packing bolts to pull
packing into place.
10. Reinstall packing diaphragm (if applicable) and wiper packing.
11. Reinstall piston and rod. See “Piston and Rod Installation” on page 4-20.
12. After tightening the crosshead nut, visually align the packing, to maintain a uniform clearance
between the packing case bore and the piston rod. Tighten rod packing bolts evenly in a criss-cross
pattern to the recommended torque in Appendix A. This procedure squares the pressure packing on
its nose gasket. Rod packing bolt tightening on high pressure cylinders requires a torque multiplier.
NOTE: Repeat final torque for rod packing bolts until the bolts no longer turn. Re-check
torque on these fasteners at the next service interval.
13. Retighten tie stud nuts. Reinstall tubing connections and instruments (if applicable). Take care not to
cross-thread tubing nuts. Tubing nuts must be tight. NOTE: After pressure packing installation,
see “Force Feed Lubricator” on page 3-24 to prime the force feed lube system and obtain
recommended lubrication rates for new machine break-in. Priming may be necessary
after extended down time. Break-in lube rates are approximately twice the normal rates,
or half the normal cycle time.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-27 of 55

CAUTION: Ariel recommends leaving distance piece covers off after any piston rod or
rod packing ring maintenance. Verify no ignition sources exist in the area, pressurize
the unit, and check for gas leaks before distance piece cover installation. This protects
against crosshead guide over-pressure and possible ignition due to incorrect
installation of packing case or components. When checking for leaks, take proper
precautions in process gas applications, such as H2S.
Reassembling and Testing Cooled Packing Cases

In the event of disassembly, the procedures below detail the reassembly of cooled rod packing cases
and testing for proper assembly. See also “Piston Rod Packing Reassembly” on page 4-26 and “Types
of Piston Rod Packing Rings” on page 4-29.
Reassembly
See pressure packing assembly in the parts book supplied with the
unit. Contact the distributor to obtain a parts book. A pressure packing
assembly drawing comes with each pressure packing re-build kit.
Cooled cases are lapped. Take special care not to scratch cup mating
surfaces; it can cause significant problems. Cup surfaces must be
clean and dry for reassembly.
1. The cups are numbered on the outside diameter. Assemble them in
consecutive order, starting with the end cup. The offset studs allow
the cups to fit only one way.
2. Ensure the tie studs thread completely into the end cup. Install the
proper ring facing the proper direction in the groove. Do not scratch FIGURE 4-25 Cooled
lapped faces when sliding parts onto tie studs. Packing Turnaround Cups
3. Install next cup. Install the rings and verify installation of the two (2)
small O-rings around the coolant holes.
4. Repeat step 3 to assemble remaining parts in consecutive order per the packing case drawing.
5. Install tie stud nuts. Tighten 10-24 nuts to 20 lb-in. and 1/4”-20 to 72 lb-in. Verify all rings move freely,
radially, in the grooves. Side loaded WAT and AL rings are snug, but should move manually.
Testing
1. Verify 100% function for all internal passages. Blow dry, oil-free compressed air through the
connection taps on the flange and verify that air exits at the proper holes. Air applied to the
connection tap stamped “Coolant In” should exit the connection tap stamped “Coolant Out”. Air
applied to the tap stamped “Lube” should exit the appropriate cup on the inside diameter of the case.
2. Pressure leak test packing cases as follows:
a. Plug the “Coolant Out” connection.
b. Apply 60 to 100 psig dry, oil-free compressed air to the “Coolant In” connection through a ball
valve with a calibrated pressure gauge located between the ball valve and packing case.
c. Close the ball valve and disconnect the air supply. There should be no pressure drop for 5
minutes, minimum.
Page 4-28 of 55 REV: 07/19

3. Disassemble, inspect, correct, re-assemble, and re-test any case that fails testing. To aid sealing,
bolt a packing case into place in a cylinder head with properly torqued original packing retention
bolts.
Long Two-Compartment Intermediate Packing

Compressors supplied with long two-compartment distance pieces include an intermediate packing
assembly that seals around the rod between the outboard and inboard distance pieces. This packing
assembly includes a single AL ring set.
For lubricated service, the force feed lube oils the top of the ring set at a very low rate because this ring
set is not subject to cylinder pressures and temperatures. The end-to-end seal in the cup and the low
lube rate of AL ring sets, ensures newly installed rings run virtually dry for the first few hours of
operation. To avoid damage to the rings and rod, copiously oil the ring set during installation, before rod
installation. Use only the same lubricant in the force feed lube system. If non-lube, see Appendix F.
Types of Piston Rod Packing Rings

There are several types of piston rod packing rings depending on the application. Below are those used
in Ariel JGH:E:K:T compressors.
“P” Pressure Breaker

This single ring is cut radially into three equal segments. It breaks
down or slows gas flow without sealing it completely.
FIGURE 4-26 “P”

Pressure Breaker
“UP” Pressure Breaker

This single solid ring breaks down or slows gas flow without sealing it
completely.
FIGURE 4-27 “UP”

Pressure Breaker
REV: 07/19 Page 4-29 of 55

“P1U” Pressure Breaker

This two-ring set allows controlled leakage in one direction
only and installs in the first or second packing cup (closest to
the piston). The first ring (pressure side) is one-piece with a
single radial cut; the second ring is solid and has a bore
larger than the rod diameter.
FIGURE 4-28 “P1U”

Pressure Breaker
“BTR” Single-Acting Seal Set

This three-ring set seals in one direction only. The
first ring (pressure side) is radially cut. The
second ring is tangentially step cut and made of
the same material as the first ring. These two
rings are doweled to stagger the cuts from one
ring to the other. The third ring is called a back-up
ring. It is radially cut and has a bore larger than
the rod diameter. This allows the radial joints to
form a tight gas seal. This ring needs no dowel. FIGURE 4-29 “BTR” Single-Acting Seal Set
“BTS” Single-Acting Seal Set

second ring is tangentially step cut. These first
two rings are doweled to stagger the cuts from
one ring to the other. The third ring is called a
back-up ring. It is an uncut one-piece ring with
clearance over the rod. It allows the joints of the
first two rings to form a gas-tight seal and
prevents extrusion of the tangent ring. FIGURE 4-30 “BTS” Single-Acting Seal Set
“BD” Double-Acting Seal Set

This two-ring set consists of tangentially step cut rings
doweled to stagger the tangential cuts from one ring to the
other. This double acting set seals in either direction. In
cylinders operating near atmospheric pressure, it prevents
air from entering the cylinder. Install with the match mark
letters facing towards the cylinder.
FIGURE 4-31 “BD” Double-Acting Seal

Set
Page 4-30 of 55 REV: 07/19

Double "WAT" Double-Acting Seal

Set
In this three-ring PTFE set, the first two rings
(pressure side) are radially cut; the third is
tangentially step cut. The last two rings are
doweled to stagger the cuts from one ring to the
other. The first ring, along with the center ring,
forms a wedge that overcomes rod friction and
holds the ring set against both groove faces FIGURE 4-32 Double “WAT” Double-Acting Seal
during either direction of rod travel. Use this ring Set
set primarily for low pressure applications. WAT
rings must be centered when installed in the
packing case.
“AL” Double-Acting Seal Set

This five-ring PTFE set functions like a
double-ended “WAT” ring set. AL rings
must be centered when installed in the
packing case.
FIGURE 4-33 “AL” Double-Acting Seal Set
“BT” Single-Acting Seal Set

This two-ring set seals in one direction only. The first ring
(pressure side) is radially cut; the second is tangentially step
cut. The rings are doweled to stagger the cuts from one ring
to the other and form a tight gas seal.
FIGURE 4-34 “BT”

Single-Acting Seal Set
“BTS” Single-Acting Seal Set

second ring is tangentially step cut. These first
two rings are doweled to stagger the cuts from
one ring to the other. The third ring is called a
back-up ring. It is an uncut one-piece ring with
clearance over the rod. It allows the joints of the
first two rings to form a gas-tight seal and
prevents extrusion of the tangent ring. FIGURE 4-35 “BTS” Single-Acting Seal Set
REV: 07/19 Page 4-31 of 55

“BTUU” Single-Acting Seal Set

This four-ring set seals in one direction only. The
first ring (pressure side) is radially cut; the second
is tangentially step cut. These rings are doweled
to stagger the cuts from one ring to the other. The
third and fourth are uncut one-piece rings with
clearance over the rod, allowing the joints of the
first two rings to form a gas-tight seal. In many
FIGURE 4-36 “BTUU” Single-Acting Seal Set
applications, the uncut rings will deflect under
pressure and seal against the piston rod.
“CU” Single-Acting Seal Set

second ring is tangentially cut. The first two rings
are doweled to stagger the cuts from one ring to
the other. The third ring is a solid back-up ring and
has a bore larger than the rod diameter, allowing
radial joints of the first two rings to form a tight gas
seal.
FIGURE 4-37 “CU” Single-Acting Seal Set
“CUU” Single-Acting Seal Set

This four-ring set seals in one direction only. The
first ring (pressure side) is radially cut; the second
is tangentially cut. These rings are doweled to
stagger the cuts from one ring to the other. The
third and fourth rings are solid and have bores
larger than the rod diameter, allowing the radial
joints of the first two rings to form a tight gas seal.
FIGURE 4-38 “CUU” Single-Acting Seal Set
Page 4-32 of 55 REV: 07/19

“STU” Single-Acting Seal Set

first ring (pressure side) is solid, with radial
grooves on the pressure side. The second ring is
tangentially cut. The third ring is solid.
FIGURE 4-39 “STU” Single-Acting Seal Set
“CR” Single-Acting Seal Set

second ring is tangentially cut. The first two rings
are doweled to stagger the cuts from one ring to
the other. The third ring is called a back-up ring. It
is radially cut and has a bore larger than the rod
diameter to allow the radial joints to form a tight
gas seal.
FIGURE 4-40 “CR” Single-Acting Seal Set
“3RWS” Oil Wiper Set

The three rings in this set are radially cut and
doweled to stagger the cuts from one ring to the
other. They keep crankcase oil out of the packing
and cylinder. Assemble with the blank face
towards the oil (crankcase) and the slotted side
towards the pressure packing.
FIGURE 4-41 “3RWS” Oil Wiper Set
REV: 07/19 Page 4-33 of 55

Crossheads
CAUTION: Before removing a cylinder head, back off all cap screws 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Verify the head is loose and the cylinder is completely vented. Crossheads are heavy.
Handle with care to avoid personal injury. The balance sheet that comes in the manual
with each compressor lists each crosshead weight.
Crosshead Removal
NOTE: See Section 1 for
illustrations of tools
mentioned below.
1. Remove crosshead guide
side covers and head end
cylinder head or
unloader.
2. Move crosshead to its
inner dead center
position. Back off, but do
not remove, the
crosshead nut set
screws.
3. Loosen crosshead nut
with the special slugging
peg or open end wrench, 1. Shoe Area 4. End Plate 6. Crosshead 9. Set Screw
Nut (loosen before
depending on nut type. Or 2. Bushing 5. Thru Bolt Lock
Nut 7. Roll Pin turning nut)
use separately purchased 3. Crosshead
hydraulic crosshead nut Pin 8. Thru Bolt
torque tool. FIGURE 4-42 Typical Crosshead
4. Use the piston nut
spanner to turn the piston
rod out of the crosshead. The two dowels on the spanner fit holes in the piston nut. Remove
crosshead nut from piston rod. Install the piston rod entry sleeve and push the rod end forward
towards the cylinder until the rod end clears the wiper packing assembly.
5. With crosshead in its outer dead center position, remove crosshead pin thru-bolt, lock nut, end-
plates and pin. Discard old lock nut.
6. Turn crankshaft to its inner dead center position.
7. Install crosshead installation/removal tool.
Page 4-34 of 55 REV: 07/19

8. Remove oil wiper packing from crosshead guide

diaphragm.
9. Move crosshead to its outer dead center position, free of
the connecting rod. Support connecting rod so it does
not drop and damage the crosshead guide surface.
10. Push crosshead onto crosshead installation/removal tool
and rotate crosshead 90°.
11. Slide a metal plate into the gap between the crosshead
and crosshead guide, 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick (see
FIGURE 4-44).
12. Remove diaphragm from crosshead guide and slide
crosshead out of crosshead guide onto the plate.
13. Check crosshead pin to bushing clearance (see Appendix
B). Determine pin wear by inspection.
FIGURE 4-43 Crosshead Bushing
14. Replace pin, if necessary. To replace bushings, hacksaw Replacement
or file to within 1/32 inches (1 mm) of their thickness, then
drift them out.
15. New bushing installation requires a press. To install a bushing in the crosshead, cool the bushing in
95% alcohol with dry ice solution. Leave the bushing in the solution long enough to reach the same
temperature as the solution, about -110°F (-80°C). An alternate method of cooling is to submerge
the bushing in liquid nitrogen. When the nitrogen stops bubbling, the temperature has reached
equilibrium, and the bushing is ready to install.
CAUTION: Do not touch cold surfaces without proper protection. Alcohol is

flammable; use it only in open air or well-ventilated buildings. Avoid sparks and open
flame. Avoid alcohol vapors which may cause injury to nose and eye tissue. Do not
return solution to a closed container until it reaches room temperature or container
may explode.
NOTE: Directly support the crosshead side receiving the new bushing to prevent the
press from possibly crushing the crosshead (see FIGURE 4-43). Thoroughly clean
bushing and crosshead to prevent dirt accumulation between bushing and crosshead
bore.
16. Where applicable, verify oil holes in the bushing line up with the holes in the crosshead.
17. Inspect shoe surfaces. Except for light polishing, there should be no wear or de-lamination.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-35 of 55

Crosshead Installation
NOTE: Return crossheads to their original throw
location. Use frame oil for lubrication where needed.
1. Lay an installation plate in the bottom of the crosshead
guide, 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and lay crosshead on its
side (see FIGURE 4-44). Oil crosshead and guide
surfaces and push crosshead into position.
2. Mount crosshead installation tool onto crosshead guide
diaphragm and oil tool bearing surfaces (see FIGURE 4-
44). Slide crosshead onto tool.
NOTE: Long two-compartment crosshead guides
supplied prior to 11/08 require a crosshead FIGURE 4-44 Crosshead Installation
installation tool with a smaller pilot diameter.
Contact Ariel for the proper tool.
3. Remove the plate. Rotate crosshead 90°. If crosshead becomes wedged, do not force it; it will
damage the crosshead shoe surface. Use a box end wrench on the connecting rod bolt to lever the
small end of the connecting rod into the centered position, then slide the crosshead into the guide
under the connecting rod and off of the installation tool. Be careful not to damage crosshead shoe or
crosshead slide surfaces during installation.
4. Remove crosshead installation tool and reinstall
wiper packing.
5. Turn crankshaft to its outer dead center position
to locate the connecting rod in position and
insert crosshead pin. Deburr and clean the
crosshead pin alignment tool for use on the
opposite side of the crosshead to assist pin
insertion. Oil crosshead pin, alignment tool,
crosshead, and connecting rod bushing prior to
installation. Install crosshead pin end-plates (be
careful to align roll pins with holes in the end
plates), thru-bolt, and a new lock nut. Tighten
thru-bolt and lock nut to the torque listed in FIGURE 4-45 Crosshead Alignment Tool
Appendix A.
6. Reposition throw to inner dead center and push the piston rod assembly toward the crosshead far
enough to remove piston rod entry sleeve.
7. Lubricate piston rod threads with Never-Seez regular grade. Apply a thin coat of oil to either the
balance nut or crosshead mating surface. Do not apply Never-Seez to the mating surfaces. Install
crosshead-balance nut on piston rod.
8. Push the rod into the crosshead and turn the piston rod assembly until the required crank end piston
clearance is reached. NOTE: At this point, set piston end clearance or serious damage may
occur. See required piston crank end clearance on cylinder data plate or Appendix B.
9. Insert a feeler gauge, equal to the required crank end clearance, through an open valve pocket. For
13 in. (330 mm) and larger cylinders, insert feeler gauge through a bottom valve pocket. Tighten the
piston rod into the crosshead until piston is tight against the feeler gauge, and the feeler gauge can
be removed manually.
Page 4-36 of 55 REV: 07/19

10. Tighten crosshead-balance nut in one

of two ways:
a. Strike the special slugging peg or
open end wrench with a dead blow
semi-soft faced hammer until an
audible difference can be heard or
the wrench “bounces” indicating a
tight nut. Some mechanics obtain
desired tightness in 3 to 4 strikes;
others may require more.
b. Use a separately purchased
crosshead-balance nut hydraulic
torque tool and hand pump kit. See
Appendix A for the hydraulic
pressure to apply to the torque
tool. When initially installing the
tool, position the spanner wrench
adapter open area toward the FIGURE 4-46 Typical Crosshead Balance Nut Hydraulic
Torque Tool - Tightening Position
spanner wrench as shown in
FIGURE 4-46. Apply hydraulic
pressure to the ram to tighten the
crosshead-balance nut. When the
ram ends its travel, release pressure and index the ram to the spanner wrench slot and/or
spanner wrench to adapter, until the nut stops moving at the specified hydraulic pressure (see
Appendix A). During tightening, if the adapter open area turns 90° before the nut is tight, remove
the spanner wrench. Remove the bolting in the spanner wrench adapter to the crosshead-
balance nut and reposition the adapter so the open area again faces the spanner wrench.
CAUTION: Do not allow open areas of the spanner wrench and adapter to overlap,
as the spanner wrench can be sprung. If the wrench becomes sprung, destroy and
replace it.
When nut is tight, remove feeler gauge. Verify removal of all tools from cylinder and crosshead
guide.
11. For all cylinders except tandem: With the head end head or unloader properly installed (closed
position) and fasteners tightened, rotate crankshaft 180° to outer dead center position of throw.
Remove a top head end valve. Determine required piston head end clearance limits from cylinder
data plate or Appendix B. Measure head end clearance at the top of the head end, using feeler
gauges through the open valve pocket. Determine if measured clearance is within tolerance.
Tighten the crosshead-balance nut set screws. Re-install valve assemblies and properly tighten
fasteners. See “Valve Installation” on page 4-11.
For tandem cylinders: Set piston head end clearance. See “Measuring Head End Clearance for
Forged Steel Tandem Cylinders with Concentric Valves” on page B-10.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-37 of 55

12. Check piston rod runout and crosshead clearances upon re-assembly, any time a piston rod is
removed. Check crosshead guide to crosshead clearance at the top by inserting a standard 0.5 inch
(13 mm) wide feeler stock from one side edge of the crosshead across to the opposite side - do this
at both ends. Check bottom clearance with 0.0015 inch (0.038 mm) feeler stock at the four corners. If
the feeler at the bottom inserts more than 0.5 inch (13 mm), the assembly is not acceptable.See
Appendix B for crosshead clearances.
13. Examine top cover and side cover seals. If there is doubt about their condition, replace them. Apply
Never-seez Regular Grade to both sides of the gasket to ease future removal. Replace top cover
and crosshead guide side covers. Tighten all cap screws hand wrench tight.
Connecting Rods
A connecting rod assembly consists of a rod with bushing, a rod cap, rod cap bolts (4), and two half
bearing shells. The bearing shells join together to form the connecting rod bearing.
CAUTION: To prevent personal injury, verify neither driver nor compressor cylinder gas
pressure can turn the compressor crankshaft during maintenance. Follow appropriate
lock out procedures. Before any maintenance or component removal, relieve all
pressure from compressor cylinders. See packager information to completely vent the
system or call the packager for assistance. After maintenance, purge the entire system
with gas prior to operation to avoid a potentially explosive air/gas mixture.
Connecting Rod Removal

1. Remove top cover from crankcase and side covers from crosshead guides.
2. Remove the middle frame spacer bar of the three over the desired pair of throws. Spacer bars are
compressor and throw dependent. They are match-marked with the throw position and machined
with a snug fit. After bolt removal, spacer bars should remove easily by hand with maybe a slight
resistance. A very loose or tight fit indicates an unlevel frame, softfoot, incorrect crosshead guide
shimming, improperly adjusted discharge bottle wedges, or pipe stress affecting the cylinder flange
fit. Correct any of these conditions before returning the compressor to service. If a spacer bar is tight
and will not easily come out, it may help to loosen one bolt on each spacer bar above the nearest
main bearing caps.
3. Move throw to outer dead center position.
4. Remove crosshead as described in “Crosshead Removal” on page 4-34 .
5. Turn the crankshaft until the throw is at its highest point. Loosen all four bolts, but keep them snug
against the rod cap.
6. Turn the crankshaft until the throw is at outer dead center.
7. Loosen all connecting rod bolts approximately 3/4 in. (19 mm).
8. Use the connecting rod cap removal tool to jack against the bolt heads and pull the rod cap free from
the dowels (see Section 1). If the cap does not separate easily from the rod, STOP; the rod cap may
be in a bind, which can break the dowel pins. If binding occurs, re-tighten the connecting rod bolts
and repeat the procedure. NOTE: Do not pry or chisel to separate cap from rod; it damages
the connecting rod and can break the alignment dowel pins.
Page 4-38 of 55 REV: 07/19

9. After the cap separates from the rod, remove the cap removal tool and back out the connecting rod
bolts completely, but do not remove them. Do not remove the bolts and cap until step 11.
10. Support the cap and rod by hand while another person slides the connecting rod into the crosshead
guide where it can be easily removed.
11. Rotate the rod cap around to the top of the crankshaft. Remove bolts, then remove cap. Always
remove the bolts before the cap to prevent damage to the crankshaft.
Connecting Rod Bearing Removal

NOTE: See Customer Technical Bulletin 192, and ER-124 for important information
regarding JGE:K:T connecting rods and connecting rod bearings.
1. Remove frame top cover, all crosshead guide covers and applicable distance piece covers to access
the wiper packing gland bolts.
2. Remove all head end heads.
3. Remove the bolts attaching the wiper packing
housing to the crosshead guide. Slide the entire
wiper packing assembly towards the cylinder.
4. Remove the middle frame spacer bar of the
three over each pair of throws. If replacing main
and rod bearings, remove all spacer bars.
Spacer bars are compressor and throw
dependent. They are match-marked with the
throw position and machined with a snug fit.
After bolt removal, spacer bars should remove
easily by hand with maybe a slight resistance. A
very loose or tight fit indicates an unlevel frame,
softfoot, incorrect crosshead guide shimming,
improperly adjusted discharge bottle wedges, or 1. Top Face 4. Rod Cap
pipe stress affecting the cylinder flange fit.
Correct any of these conditions before returning 2. Connecting Rod Bolts 5. Rod
the compressor to service. If a spacer bar is tight 3. Threaded Hole for Eyebolt
and will not easily come out, it may help to
loosen one bolt on each spacer bar above the FIGURE 4-47 Rod/Rod Cap Separation
nearest main bearing caps.
5. Turn the crankshaft until the throw is at its highest point. Loosen all four bolts, but keep them snug
against the rod cap.
6. Turn the crankshaft until the throw is at outer dead center.
7. Loosen all connecting rod bolts approximately 3/4 in. (19 mm).
8. Use the connecting rod cap removal tool to jack against the bolt heads and pull the rod cap free from
the dowels (see Section 1). If the cap does not separate easily from the rod, STOP; the rod cap may
be in a bind, which can break the dowel pins. If binding occurs, re-tighten the connecting rod bolts
and repeat the procedure. NOTE: Do not pry or chisel to separate cap from rod; it damages
the connecting rod and can break the alignment dowel pins.
9. After the cap separates from the rod, remove the cap removal tool and back out the connecting rod
bolts completely, but do not remove them. Do not remove the bolts and cap until step 11.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-39 of 55

10. Support the cap and rod by hand or crane while another person pries the crank end of the crosshead
toward the cylinder until it bottoms out. When the connecting rod is clear of the crankshaft, rest it on
the crosshead guide slide. Do not allow the rod or cap to drop, as damage can occur.
11. Rotate the rod cap around to the top of the crankshaft. Remove bolts, then remove cap. Always
remove the bolts before the cap to prevent damage to the crankshaft.
12. Lift cap while holding bearing in the cap because oil causes the bearing to stick to the crankshaft pin.
13. Rotate the crank to inner dead center and remove the connecting rod bearing.
14. After removing bearings, clean any coking or debris from both the rod and rod cap surfaces with a
non-metallic Scotch-Brite or similar scouring pad and solvent. Check for raised edges on machined
surfaces. All surfaces should be as clean and dry as possible.
Connecting Rod Bearing Installation

1. Check new bearing shells for handling
damage, scratches, burrs, and loose material
at the tabs. DO NOT RUB BEARING
SURFACE WITH FINGERNAIL. New
bearing shells and crankshaft crank pin
bearing surfaces must be absolutely clean. Fit
the tab of a new, dry half bearing shell into the
rod notch. NOTE: Where bearings are
identified with an ink pictograph,
connecting rod bearings and main
bearings are not interchangeable. DO
NOT put main bearings in a connecting
rod. Do not mix part numbers on an
individual main or connecting rod. Both
bearing half shells must have the same
part number. 1. Rod 4. Rod Notch 7. Dowels
2. Thoroughly inspect the crank pin for dings and 2. Rod Bushing 5. Bearing Shell 8. Rod Cap
3. Dowel Holes 6. Bearing Shell Notch
scratches. If needed, use an Arkansas stone
to dress dings and scratches (Norton Hard Tab 9. Rod Cap
Translucent Arkansas Stone, 3” x 1/2” x 1/2” FIGURE 4-48 Connecting Rod Bearing Installation
(76 x 13 x 13 mm), product number HF-43).
Lightly slide the stone around the
circumference of the crank pin surface to remove any high spots; do not slide it back and forth over
the length of the crank pin. After dressing, ensure the crank pin is clean and dry. If the crank is scored
around the circumference, use 600 grit emery cloth to remove high spots.
3. Apply clean, new lube oil liberally to the crank pin.
4. Fit the tab of the other bearing shell into the rod cap notch.
5. Attach the rod cap to the rod:
a. Rotate crankshaft to approximately outer dead center.
b. Carefully lower the connecting rod cap (WITHOUT BOLTS!) onto the crank pin. Verify rod bolts
are undamaged and free of dirt. Lubricate them per Appendix A, then place all four bolts into the
rod cap. NOTE: Ariel stamps throw numbers on all rod caps and rods. Install a rod cap
in the correct throw location with the stamped numbers facing up.
Page 4-40 of 55 REV: 07/19

c. Rotate cap so the bolts align with the connecting rod bolt holes. Support the rod cap while
another person carefully pries the connecting rod towards the crankshaft until it bottoms out.
Align the rod cap dowels with the rod dowel holes and push the rod cap onto the rod with even
pressure. The rod cap fits onto the rod only one way. Do not force the rod cap onto the rod; the
dowels should slide into the rod holes without difficulty. After ensuring the rod cap seats properly
on the rod, snug all four bolts and pre-torque according to Appendix A.
d. Rotate the crankshaft until the throw is at its highest point and tighten all conn rod bolts to the
torque listed in Appendix A.
6. Repeat steps 1-5 for all remaining connecting rods.
7. Measure each connecting rod bearing jack and thrust clearance as detailed in this document. If
clearance readings are not within tolerances of Appendix B, contact your packager or Ariel before
proceeding. NOTE: If replacing main bearings, continue to "Main Bearing Removal". If not
replacing main bearings, continue to Step 8.
8. Install spacer bars so the match mark is up and next to the spacer bar boss with the same mark.
Tighten all spacer-bar cap screws to the torque listed in Appendix A.
9. Account for all tools, equipment, supplies, and parts to ensure none are left inside the crankcase.
11. Reverse lockout procedures.
12. After replacing bearings, thoroughly pre-lube compressor to ensure bearing lubrication and to help
remove foreign materials from the lube system.
13. Run the compressor according to the time intervals listed on the form in Appendix D. After each run,
shut down and remove the frame top cover. Measure main and connecting rod bearing cap
temperatures with a hand held thermocouple probe or infrared thermometer and record them on a
copy of the form in Appendix D. Complete the form and email or fax it to Ariel Field Service.
14. After each shutdown, visually inspect the crankcase for signs of excessive heat in bearing areas,
and babbitt or other debris. If any are found, find and correct the problem before continuing.
Connecting Rod Bushing Removal and Installation

1. Check crosshead pin to bushing clearance (see Appendix B). Determine pin wear by inspection.
Replace pin, if necessary.
2. To replace a bushing, file or hacksaw the existing bushing to reduce the tightness of the shrink fit.
From the inside diameter, file or saw across the length of the bushing to within 1/32 inches (1 mm) of
its radial thickness. It can then be easily drifted out. DO NOT file or saw into the connecting rod;
any bore damage renders the rod useless and requires rod replacement.
3. Use a hydraulic press in a qualified machine shop to install the new bushing. Do not hammer
bushing into place; it will distort the bushing bore.
4. Before installation, cool new bushing in a 95% alcohol and dry ice solution. Leave bushing in solution
long enough to reach the solution temperature, about -110°F (-80°C).
REV: 07/19 Page 4-41 of 55

5. Position connecting rod on the press table so the chamfered edge of the rod bushing bore is on top.
Press bushing into rod bore. Align bushing oil hole with connecting rod oil passage (if applicable)
before pressing bushing in. The bushing has an annular groove around its outside diameter aligned
with the oil hole; if the bushing shifts in the connecting rod during operation, oil still travels to the
bushing inside diameter and to the crosshead pin. However, a new bushing installation should cover
no more than 1/3 of the rod oil passage hole. For ELP units with no drilled hole in the connecting rod,
bushing hole alignment is not critical. See CTB-192.
CAUTION: Do not touch cold surfaces without proper protection. Alcohol is

flammable; use it only in open air or well-ventilated buildings. Avoid sparks and open
flame. Avoid alcohol vapors which may cause injury to nose and eye tissue. Do not
return solution to a closed container until it reaches room temperature or container
may explode.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean bushing and connecting rod to prevent dirt accumulation
between them. Immediately assemble them so the bushing does not warm and stick
before it is in place. If the bushing sticks, remove it by notching as in step 2 above.
Connecting Rod Installation

1. To install a new connecting rod, stamp match mark numbers matching the throw location on the tops
of the connecting rod and bearing cap (with bearing notches up). See FIGURE 4-49.
2. Check new bearing shells for handling damage, scratches, burrs, and loose material at the tabs. DO
NOT RUB BEARING SURFACE WITH FINGERNAIL. New bearing shells and crankshaft crank
pin bearing surfaces must be absolutely clean. Snap a new, dry half bearing shell into the rod and
rod cap with the bearing tabs properly located in the rod and cap notches. Turn the connecting rod
pin to the vertical position and oil crankshaft connecting rod pin bearing surfaces with new clean
lubricating oil, the same type used in the frame. Carefully lower the connecting rod cap (without
bolts) onto the pin.
NOTE: Connecting rod bearings and main bearings are not interchangeable. Connecting
rod bearings have a narrower groove or no groove at all. DO NOT put main bearings in
connecting rod bearing locations.
NOTE: Caps and rods are numbered by throw beginning with number one at the drive
end. For throw numbering sequence, see FIGURE i-1. Always install rods with numbers
up. Protect crank pin at all times. Be sure both bearing tabs are on top.
3. Verify rod bolts are undamaged and free of dirt, then lubricate them per Appendix A and insert all
bolts into rod cap. Rotate the cap and fit the connecting rod to the rod pin and snug the bolts, pulling
the cap and rod together evenly.
4. Reconnect rod and crosshead with pin. Install end plates, thru-bolt, and new lock nut. Tighten lock
nut to the torque listed in the Appendix A.
Page 4-42 of 55 REV: 07/19

5. Follow the "Recommendations for Torque

Accuracy" in Appendix A to tighten connecting
rod cap screws to the recommended torque.
6. Place a turn indicator onto the wrench socket,
and slide the socket onto the bolt head. Turn the
indicator so the vial faces up with the bubble
centered, then tighten the indicator
thumbscrew. Turn connecting rod cap screws to
the angle recommended in Appendix A.
FIGURE 4-49 Typical Connecting Rod
7. Measure each connecting rod bearing to
crankshaft jack clearance and connecting rod
thrust (side) clearance (see "Connecting Rod Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement" and
"Connecting Rod Thrust (Side) Clearance Measurement" below). Record measurements on a copy
of the form in Appendix 1. If measurements are out of tolerance after installing new bearings, contact
your packager or Ariel before proceeding.
8. Reinstall spacer bars. All spacer bars are match-marked for proper location; reinstall them in their
original location. Tighten all spacer bar bolts to the torque listed in Appendix A
Connecting Rod Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement

1. Turn the crankshaft pin of the desired throw to its highest position. For JGH:E:K:T models, thread an
eye bolt into the connecting rod (see FIGURE 4-50).
2. Attach the magnetic base of a dial indicator to the crankshaft web adjacent to the connecting rod.
Place the point of the dial indicator against the top of the connecting rod near the center of the cap
seam.
3. Zero the dial indicator. Insert a pry bar into the eye bolt and pry against the frame to force the
connecting rod up until the dial indicator needle stops moving. While maintaining upward pressure,
note the reading.
4. Release upward pressure and push downward on the rod until the indicator reads zero again. If a
zero reading cannot be obtained, zero the indicator again and repeat steps 3 and 4. Repeat the
measurement process until the measurement returns to zero twice in a row to verify accuracy.
5. Repeat measurement process for every rod. If a reading is outside the tolerances of Appendix B,
contact your packager or Ariel. NOTE: Remove eye bolts, magnetic bases, dial indicators,
and pry bars after measurement.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-43 of 55

FIGURE 4-50 Typical Connecting Rod Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement
Connecting Rod Thrust (Side) Clearance Measurement

1. Turn the crankshaft pin of the desired throw to its highest position.
2. Attach the magnetic base of a dial indicator to the side of the crankshaft web adjacent to the
connecting rod. Place the button of the dial indicator against the thrust surface of the connecting rod
(see FIGURE 4-51).
3. Use a pry bar to pry against the crankshaft web and thrust the connecting rod tight toward the dial
indicator (do not pry on rod cap). Release pressure and zero the dial indicator.
4. Thrust the connecting rod tight in the opposite direction until the dial indicator needle stops moving.
Release pressure and note reading. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to verify measurement accuracy.
5. Repeat the measurement process for every rod. If a reading is outside the tolerances in Appendix B,
contact your packager or Ariel. NOTE: Remove magnetic bases, dial indicators, and pry bars
after measurement.
FIGURE 4-51 Typical Connecting Rod Thrust (Side) Clearance Measurement
Crankshafts
The crankshaft is the heart of the compressor. With proper maintenance, it should provide years of
trouble-free service.
Oil Slinger Replacement
CAUTION: Do not touch hot surfaces without proper protection.
Page 4-44 of 55 REV: 07/19

Although the slinger should last indefinitely with proper care, it may become nicked. To replace it on a
JGH:E:K:T/2/4:
1. Suspend the crankshaft as detailed in "Crankshaft Removal" and heat the slinger to about 400°F
(204°C). When it expands, it is easily removed.
2. Slide a minimum ½-inch (13mm) diameter rod through the new slinger. Do not mar slinger surfaces,
and be careful of its sharp outer edge. Suspend the slinger and heat it with a small torch. When it
reaches about 400°F (204°C), slip it over the drive end of the crankshaft. Hold the slinger in place
with high temperature gloves or two pieces of clean wood. Rotate it slightly to ensure squareness,
until it cools enough to shrink onto the crankshaft.
JGE:K:T/6 frames have a bolt-on oil slinger that requires no heat for removal or installation. Tighten
bolts to the torque listed in Appendix A.
Main Bearing Removal

1. Remove top cover and spacer bars.
Spacer bars are compressor and 1. Puller Nut - turn
throw dependent. They are match- to pull bearing
marked with the throw position and cap straight up.
machined with a snug fit. After bolt 2. Rectangular
removal, spacer bars should Steel Bar
remove easily by hand with maybe a Clearance
slight resistance. A very loose or Hole:11/16 in.
tight fit indicates an unlevel frame, (18 mm)
softfoot, incorrect crosshead guide Length:21 in.
shimming, improperly adjusted (533 mm)
discharge bottle wedges, or pipe 3. Drill Hole
stress affecting the cylinder flange 4. Threaded Rod
fit. Correct any of these conditions Nominal Size:
before returning the compressor to 5/8 in. - 11
service. Length:11 in.
(280 mm)
2. Remove the four main (journal) 5. Lock Nut
bearing cap screws. Pull caps 6. Puller Hole
straight up to prevent damage to the 7. Crankshaft
dowel fit. If cap is tight, use a
bearing cap puller (see FIGURE 4- FIGURE 4-52 Main Bearing Cap Puller
52). Remove shells from main
bearing caps.
3. Remove main journal bearing shells from under the crankshaft one at a time. If needed, attach clean
nylon straps around the crankshaft and lift it 0.003 - 0.005 inch (0.076 - 0.127 mm) to lessen weight
on the bearings and allow easier removal. To remove, rotate shell under the crankshaft tab side out
first, by pushing or tapping with a non-metallic tool on the opposite side. Ariel provides an optional
tool (B-3340) to push the shell out. Do not damage crankshaft bearing surfaces. Replace with new
bearing shell, before rotating out the next main bearing shell.
4. If any coked oil is observed on bearing cap or frame saddle surfaces, contact Ariel for instructions.
Check for raised edges on machined surfaces. Verify all surfaces are clean and dry as possible and
no bolting is damaged.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-45 of 55

Main Bearing Installation

1. Check new bearing shells for damage, scratches, burrs, and loose material at the tab. DO NOT
RUB BEARING SURFACE WITH FINGERNAIL. Keep the backs of shells dry and clean;
installation requires perfectly clean bearing shells. Install bearing shells in caps, and frame journals,
properly located in the tab notch, (rotate in the un-tabbed end first).
NOTE: Where bearings are identified with an ink pictograph, main and connecting rod
bearings are not interchangeable. Do not put connecting rod bearings in main bearing
locations. Do not mix part numbers on an individual main or connecting rod. Both
bearing half shells must have the same part number.
2. Apply a liberal amount of clean, new lube oil to crankshaft bearing surfaces.
3. Main bearing caps have position match-marks corresponding with frame spacer bars and spacer bar
bosses. Install main bearing caps with new bearing shells in their correct locations. Verify proper
alignment of main bearing cap dowels with the holes in the crankcase base. A set screw on top of
each dowel prevents it from backing out. Seat the cap by tapping it with the handle of a hammer or
screwdriver. It is a machined fit, not a press fit, and the cap should not rock in the jaw fit when it seats.
Do not use bolting to force the cap to seat. Snug the cap screws. Starting at the thrust end, tighten
the main bearing cap bolts to the torque listed in Appendix A.
4. Check crankshaft journal bearing jack (at each bearing) and crankshaft thrust clearances to values in
Appendix B (see procedure below). Record readings on a copy of the form in Appendix D. If
readings are out of tolerance after new bearing installation, contact your packager or Ariel before
proceeding.
5. Install spacer bars so the match mark is up and next to the spacer bar boss with the same mark.
Tighten all spacer-bar cap screws to the torque listed in Appendix A.
6. Account for all tools, equipment, supplies, and parts to ensure none are left inside the crankcase.
Reinstall gaskets and top cover(s). Tighten cover bolts hand wrench tight.
7. Reverse lockout procedures.
8. After replacing bearings, pre-lube compressor for 10-15 minutes at 30 psi (2.1 barg) to ensure
bearing lubrication and to help remove foreign materials from the lube system.
9. Run the compressor according to the time intervals listed on the form in Appendix D. After each run,
shut down and remove the frame top cover. After each shutdown, visually inspect the crankcase for
signs of excessive heat in bearing areas, and babbitt or other debris. If any are found, find and
correct the problem before continuing. Measure main and connecting rod bearing cap temperatures
with a hand held thermocouple probe or infrared thermometer and record them on a copy of the form
in Appendix D. Complete the form and email or fax it to Ariel Field Service.
Crankshaft Removal
1. Remove coupling disk pack. The coupling hub may be removed now, but it may be easier after
crankshaft removal. If the hub is not removed, the drive end cover cannot be removed and must lift
out with the crankshaft. Remove all drive end cover mounting bolts. Remove the two tapered dowel
pins from the drive end cover.
2. Remove top cover and spacer bars.
Page 4-46 of 55 REV: 07/19

3. Do not damage the sharp corners on each end of the crankcase top. They form a junction between
the end covers, top cover, and base; keep them sharp and unmarred to prevent oil leaks.
4. Detach connecting rods and move them to their full outer position. See “Connecting Rod Bearing
Removal” on page 4-39.
5. Remove chain eccentric adjustment capscrews. Turn the eccentric to loosen the chain and slip it off
the crankshaft sprocket. For more clearance while lifting the crankshaft, remove the force feed
lubricator drive sprocket.
6. Remove main bearing caps. See “Main Bearing
Removal” on page 4-45.
7. Before removing the crankshaft, prepare
wooden saddles or blocks of wood with sides
high enough to prevent the webs or oil slinger
from touching the floor to store the crankshaft
during maintenance - even if for only a short
time. Also, protect the crankshaft from above so
dropped tools or equipment cannot mar pin and
journal surfaces.
1. Oil Slinger 4. Crank Pins
8. Turn the crankshaft so that sling lifting points are
above the shaft center of gravity to prevent 2. Main Bearing Journals 5. Counterweights
rotation when lifted. Lift straight up with the 3. Chain Sprocket
crankshaft ends parallel to the frame. The
FIGURE 4-53 Typical Crankshaft
crankshaft weight requires two men and a crane
to safely remove it. Use appropriate sized nylon
slings to prevent marring the crankshaft running surface.
NOTE: Lower half bearing shells sometimes stick to the shaft journals. After lifting the
shaft about ¼ inch (6mm) clear of the saddles, verify the lower half bearing shells remain
on the saddles. If not, tap them back onto the saddles before lifting the shaft further.
9. While one person raises the crane very slowly, the second person must grasp the crankshaft at the
drive end with one hand on the counterweight or one of the throws and the other on the shaft end to
keep the crankshaft level. It may be necessary to lower the crank and reposition the straps to
achieve a balanced lift. Wear clean gloves for a good grip, to avoid cuts from the slinger, and to avoid
marring the running surface. As the shaft slowly raises, lift the drive and auxiliary ends at the same
rate. Carefully guide the crankshaft to avoid marring its surfaces.
Crankshaft Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the oil gallery that runs from the drive end to the auxiliary end of the crankcase and
the vertical and horizontal intersecting oil passages that lube the main bearings and crosshead
guides. Any debris left in the oil gallery or intersecting passageways could cause bearing or
crosshead failure. Deburr and clean main bearing caps to prepare for installation.
2. Thoroughly clean new main bearing half shells and install them in the frame saddles. Cover bearings
with clean paper towels to prevent debris contamination.
3. Remove towels just before seating the crank in the saddles. Lubricate bearing surfaces with clean
crankcase oil.
4. Move connecting rods to full outer position if not already there.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-47 of 55

5. Install the crankshaft. While the crankshaft lowers very slowly into the crankcase (suspended by a
crane with clean nylon slings), one man wearing clean gloves should grasp the drive end and slowly
maneuver the drive end and auxiliary end straight down into the crankcase. Both drive end and
auxiliary end journals should touch the bottom bearing shells at the same time.
6. Before connecting rod installation, measure each crankshaft journal bearing jack clearance with a
dial indicator (see procedure on “Main Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement” on page 4-48
and allowable clearances in Appendix B).
7. Reattach connecting rods (See “Connecting Rod Installation” on page 4-42), packing diaphragms,
and unloaders/head end heads.
8. Reinstall chain drive. (See “Chain Drive System” on page 4-49).
9. Replace spacer bars. Locate spacer bar match mark. Install spacer bar so the match mark is up and
next to the spacer bar boss with the same marking.
10. Install drive end cover with new gasket using the tapered dowel pins to properly align the cover.
Verify at least 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) clearance exists between the dust seal housing and crankshaft.
Then install a new dust seal.
11. Use a knife to trim excess from end cover gaskets flush to the compressor frame top cover rail.
Main Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement

1. Turn crankshaft until the web adjacent to the desired main bearing is vertical (see FIGURE 4-54).
2. Loop a lifting strap around the crankshaft web adjacent to the main bearing and attach the strap to a
crane. NOTE: If the crane does not have a fine adjustment, attach a chain hoist to the
crane lifting hook to prevent excessive force on the crankshaft and crane.
3. Attach the magnetic base of a dial indicator to the top of the main bearing cap. Place the point of the
dial indicator against the top of the adjacent web and zero it.
4. GENTLY lift crankshaft. The dial indicator needle moves steadily until the crane/hoist overcomes
crankshaft oil stiction, at which point the needle jumps a little. Stop lifting immediately at this point,
and note the reading.
5. Release crane/hoist pressure and repeat step 4 to verify the measurement.
6. Repeat the measurement process for each main bearing. If a reading is outside the tolerances in
Appendix B, contact your packager or Ariel. NOTE: Remove magnetic bases, dial indicators,
and lifting strap after measurement.
FIGURE 4-54 Typical Crankshaft Journal Bearing Vertical Jack Clearance Measurement
Page 4-48 of 55 REV: 07/19
Crankshaft Thrust (End) Clearance Measurement

1. Attach the magnetic base of a dial indicator to the top of a main bearing cap. Place the button of the
dial indicator against the side of the adjacent crankshaft web (see FIGURE 4-55).
2. Use a pry bar to pry against the compressor frame and thrust the crankshaft tight toward the dial
indicator. Release pressure and zero the dial indicator.
3. Thrust the crankshaft tight in the opposite direction until the dial indicator needle stops moving, then
release pressure. Note reading. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to verify measurement accuracy.
4. If the measurement is outside the tolerances in Appendix B, contact your packager or Ariel. NOTE:
Remove magnetic bases, dial indicators, and pry bar after measurement.
FIGURE 4-55 Typical Crankshaft Thrust Clearance Measurement
Chain Drive System

The chain drive system is crankshaft-driven at the auxiliary end of the frame. For JGH:E:K:T/2/4
compressors, a single chain runs the lube oil pump and force feed lubricator. An idler sprocket attached
to the eccentric adjustment cap controls chain tightness. The chain dips into the crankcase oil for
constant lubrication. In dry sump applications, an oil sprayer lubricates the chain.
For JGH:E:K:T/6 compressors, one chain runs the lube oil pump and another runs the force feed
lubricator. A separate idler sprocket for each chain, each attached to its own eccentric ajustment cap,
controls chain tightness. The lube oil pump chain dips into the crankcase oil and splash action oils the
force feed lubricator chain as well. In dry sump applications, an oil sprayer lubricates the chains.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-49 of 55

1. Force Feed Lubricator

Sprocket
2. Crankshaft Sprocket
3. Eccentric Adjustment
4. Cap Screw
5. Dust Plug
6. Chain
7. Oil Pump Sprocket
FIGURE 4-56 JGH:E:K:T/2/4
Chain Drive Systems
1. Force Feed Lubricator 5. Oil Pump Chain

Sprocket 6. Oil Pump Sprocket
2. Force Feed Lubricator 7. Oil Pump Eccentric
Chain Adjustment
3. Force Feed Lubricator 8. Cap Screw
Eccentric Adjustment 9. Dust Plug
4. Crankshaft Sprocket
FIGURE 4-57 JGE:K:T/6 Chain Drive Systems
Chain and Sprocket Replacement

Replace chain(s) if elongation exceeds 0.084
inches (2.13 mm) over a 10 pitch length. Measure
the section of chain with vernier calipers while it is
stretched tight in position in the compressor. Add
a measurement outside the rollers at 10 pitches
(X) to a measurement between the inside of the
same rollers (Y), and then divide by two. Replace FIGURE 4-58 Measuring to Check Chain
the chain if the result exceeds 5.084 inches Elongation
(129.1 mm)
Replace sprockets showing any undercutting or
other damage.
Page 4-50 of 55 REV: 07/19

Chain Idler Sprocket Replacement (Eccentric Adjustment Caps)

1. Chain idler sprocket
location varies for
standard versus reverse
rotation.
2. Remove frame top cover.
3. Remove all dust plugs
from the eccentric cap
and all cap screws
holding the eccentric cap
to the end cover. Rotate
eccentric cap to loosen 1. Dust Plug 3. Stat-O-Seal 5. Washer 7. Thru Bolt
chain for removal. Drop
2. Cap Screw 4. Self-Lock Nut 6. Sprocket
the chain off the idler
sprocket and remove FIGURE 4-59 Typical Chain Idler Sprockets (Eccentrics)
entire assembly from the
end cover.
4. Remove and discard lock nut, hex cap screw, stat-o-seal, washer, and cap O-ring.
5. Reassemble new cap screw, stat-o-seal, washer, sprocket, and lock nut. Tighten idler lock nut to
recommended torque in Appendix A.
6. Apply oil and install a new O-ring. Install assembly and chain.
7. Take care when measuring and adjusting the force feed idler sprocket; it is thinner than the force
feed lubricator and drive sprockets. To center the idler sprockets in the chain, subtract the force feed
idler sprocket thickness from the drive sprocket thickness and divide the difference by 2. Add this
value to the measurement from the inside face of the auxiliary end cover to the outside face of the
force feed idler sprocket. Adjust driven sprockets to the drive sprocket measurements, aligned within
1/32 inch (1 mm). Non-alignment may require disassembly and shimming eccentrics.
8. Adjust chain according to “Chain Adjustment” on page 4-53.
Lube Oil Pump Sprocket Replacement

1. Remove all pump piping. Remove
fasteners from pump mounting
flange. After chain removal, the
pump with sprocket comes free
through the end cover hole.
2. To position the new sprocket, use a
machinist rule to measure the exact
distance from sprocket drive face to
pump mounting flange face (X).
Note this measurement for future
reference.
1. Gaskets 3. Set Screws 5. Adapter

2. Key 4. Sprocket 6. Pump
FIGURE 4-60 Typical Lube Oil Pump Chain Sprocket
REV: 07/19 Page 4-51 of 55

3. With the oil pump on a bench, use an Allen wrench to remove the sprocket set screws, then pull the
sprocket from the shaft.
4. Remove the key from the shaft and file the shaft to smooth burrs raised by the set screw cup point.
5. Install a new key (see build book for type and dimensions). First verify it fits into the new sprocket. If
too thick, polish the key with emery cloth on a flat surface until it easily slides into the notch. The top
edge may also require a little polishing.
6. Install new sprocket to the original measurement between the sprocket drive face and the pump
mounting flange face. When in position, tighten set screws.
7. Lubricate both sides of gaskets with anti-seize lubricant or multi-purpose grease to ease future
removal. Install new gaskets.
8. Reinstall pump onto end cover. Using a straight edge, to within 1/32 inch (1 mm), check alignment to
crankshaft drive sprocket with crankshaft centered in end play. If misaligned, adjust sprocket position
as needed.
9. Adjust chain according to “Chain Adjustment” on page 4-53.
10. Reinstall all piping to pump.
Force Feed Lubricator Chain Sprocket Replacement

1. With a good machinist rule, measure exact distance from
inside face of auxiliary end cover to near face of
lubricator sprocket. Note measurement for proper
positioning of new sprocket. Remove chain.
2. Remove sprocket set screw and sprocket. Detach all
tubing from lubricator.
3. Remove mounting bracket cap screws and lubricator.
4. With the lubricator on the bench, remove key from shaft
and file shaft to remove burrs raised by set screw cup
point. Oil and install a new O-ring.
5. Dig out the shaft oil seal with an awl and install a new 1. Mounting Bracket 4. Shaft Oil Seal
Cap Screws (4) 5. Key
one.
2. Auxiliary End 6. Set Screw
6. Install a new key. Verify it fits into the new sprocket (see Cover 7. Sprocket
build book for key type and dimensions). If too thick, 3. O-Ring
polish it with emery cloth on a flat surface until it easily FIGURE 4-61 Force Feed Lubricator
slides into the notch. The top edge may also require a Chain Sprocket
little polishing.
7. After new key installation, verify the new sprocket fits, oil the new O-ring, and remount lubricator to
the end cover.
8. Slide new sprocket onto the shaft and set to dimension measured in step 1. Tighten set screw.
9. Using a straight edge, to within 1/32 inch (1 mm), check alignment to crankshaft drive sprocket with
crankshaft centered in end play. When aligning this sprocket with the idler sprocket, take into
account that the idler sprocket is thinner than the other sprockets. If misaligned, adjust sprocket
position as needed.
Page 4-52 of 55 REV: 07/19

10. Install chain and adjust according to “Chain Adjustment” on page 4-53.
11. Re-attach all tubing to lubricator.
Crankshaft Chain Sprocket Replacement
CAUTION: Do not touch hot surfaces without proper protection.
Examine sprocket carefully for wear; sprockets operating for five years
or more may require replacement. To replace a sprocket on a
JGH:E:K:T:
1. Drill a hole in the sprocket hub parallel to the shaft centerline and
big enough to remove most of the hub cross section (see figure to
the right). Multiple smaller holes may be required. DO NOT touch
shaft with drill. Mark the drill with tape to avoid drilling through the
sprocket and into the crankshaft face. The hole relieves most of the
shrink, and a few radial strikes with a hammer and chisel opens the FIGURE 4-62 Crankshaft
Sprocket Removal
sprocket enough for easy removal.
2. Suspend the new sprocket with a wire and heat it with a small torch
to about 400°F (204°C), then slip it over the auxiliary end of the crankshaft. Hold the sprocket in
place and rotate it slightly to ensure squareness until it cools enough to shrink onto the crankshaft.
Chain Adjustment
1. Roll the crankshaft to the tightest position of
the chain. This prevents snugging the chain at
a slack position and breaking rollers, or ruining
the pump and lubricator bearings when the
chain goes through its tightest position.
2. Use a tape measure to measure the longest
most easily accessible span from sprocket
center to sprocket center, where the deflection
will be gauged. Determine allowable
deflection limits for the measured span as
defined by the shaded area in FIGURE 4-64.
3. Measure chain deflection from a straight edge
held on the chain rollers where it wraps over
FIGURE 4-63 Typical Chain Deflection
the two sprockets of the span (see FIGURE 4- Measurement
63). Using a machinist’s scale with 0.01 inch or
(1.0 mm) increments, apply finger pressure to
measure the distance from the straight edge to
a chain roller at the center of the span. Record the measurement and check to see if it is in tolerance.
4. If adjustment is required, remove the cap screws and plastic plugs from the eccentric cap. Rotate the
cap clockwise to line up the first two new cap screw holes. If this tightens the chain too much, turn
the cap counterclockwise for a different hole alignment.
5. Replace and tighten the two cap screws hand wrench tight. CAUTION: Over tightening may
result in bent shafts.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-53 of 55

6. Roll the crankshaft to check tightness in several positions. At its tightest position, the chain should
deflect within the shaded limits in FIGURE 4-64 . Replace plastic caps to keep the holes clean.
FIGURE 4-64 Allowable Chain Deflection, Inches (mm)
Component Cleaning & Thread Lube for Non-Lube

Compressor Cylinders
Ariel cleans and protects complete non-lube cylinders to non-lube service requirements. Clean all
internal parts shipped loose, contaminated internal surfaces, and repair parts prior to installation, to
extend the life of rings and non-lube compressors.
Clean cylinder bore thoroughly with denatured alcohol until a clean, alcohol-soaked, white paper towel
removes no more debris. This includes all surfaces of the bore, counter bore, valve pockets, etc. Do not
use Never-Seez on steel gaskets. Apply a light film of oil to cylinder seating surfaces to seal o-rings.
CAUTION: Denatured alcohol presents health and safety hazards. It contains methyl
alcohol and is poisonous if ingested. Avoid eye and skin contact. Keep alcohol away
from heat, sparks, flame, and all other ignition sources. Use adequate ventilation,
neoprene or butyl gloves, mono-goggles or face-mask, and impermeable apron.
Properly handle and dispose of materials resulting from clean-up. See manufacturer's
material safety data sheets for more details.
Do not use any lubricants or anti-seize compounds on parts that may contact the gas stream.
Use very small amounts of Never-Seez regular grade on nut and collar when assembling piston
assembly. Thoroughly clean piston (especially the ring grooves) with denatured alcohol until a clean,
alcohol-soaked towel removes no more debris.
Disassemble packing case. Wipe all surfaces clean with denatured alcohol. Re-assemble. When the
packing case is water cooled, re-assemble and test to “Testing” on page 4-28. Handle cleaned parts
with new or clean "rubber" or new white cotton gloves.
Before piston rod installation, wipe it with denatured alcohol. Be careful not to leave fingerprints on the
rod before it contacts the packing rings. Wipe the rod with denatured alcohol after installation.
Page 4-54 of 55 REV: 07/19

Clean the head end head or unloader components with denatured alcohol. Use minimal amounts of oil
for the bolt-holes to ensure oil does not run into the cylinder. Also install the head end steel gasket
without Never-Seez.
Disassemble and clean the valves with denatured alcohol, then re-assemble, wipe them again, and
install. Clean retainers and high clearance assemblies with denatured alcohol. Use only a thin film of oil
for the valve cap O-rings and bolt-holes.
Assemble cleaned parts immediately to avoid contamination and corrosion. If cylinder will not
commence immediate service, contact Ariel for preservation instructions to ER-34.
REV: 07/19 Page 4-55 of 55

Section 5 - Start Up
Warranty Notification - Installation List Data and Start Up Check Lists for
Reciprocating Compressors JG:A:M:P:N:Q:R:J:H:E:K:T:C:D:F, KBK:T, &
KB100
The following forms are designed to ensure a successful start-up of Ariel reciprocating compressors.
Ariel warranty coverage requires these completed forms be sent to:
Administrative Assistant - Sales, Ariel Corporation
35 Blackjack Road • Mount Vernon, Ohio 43050 USA
Phone: 740-397-0311 • FAX: 740-397-3856
Email: [email protected]
Warranty Notification - Installation List Data

Date:___________________ Name:_____________________________________________
Unassigned Resale Direct Sale Lease-Purchase Rental/Lease Unit
Compressor Frame
Frame Model:______________________ Frame Serial #:_____________________________
Frame Lubricant Make and Grade:_______________________________________________
Package Startup Date:________________________________
Distributor/Fabricator
Company:______________________________________ Name:______________________
Address:___________________________________________________________________
City:__________________________________________ State:_____ Zip:_______________
Country:__________________________________
Fabricator Unit Number:_______________________________________
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Section 5 - Start Up
Application
Air/Nitrogen CNG/GNC Gathering Fuel Gas Booster

FPSO
Refrigeration Pipeline PRC Injection Storage/Withdrawal Miscellaneous
Elevation:_____________________________
H2S%:_____________ CO2%:_____________ Specific Gravity:__________________
Non-Lube: Yes No
Unit Location
Customer Name:_____________________________________________________________
Project/Lease Name: _________________________________________________________
Closest Town:________________________________ State:______ Country:____________
Offshore: Yes No
Directions to Location or GPS:__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Customer Contact Person:________________________ Contact Phone:________________
Contact Email:_________________________________________ OK to contact: Yes No
Driver
Driver Manufacturer:_________________________________ Driver Model:______________
Driver Type:___________________ Applied RPM:_______ Name Plate HP (kW):_________
Coupling Manufacturer:____________________________ Coupling Model:______________
Page 5-2 of 10 REV: 07/19

Section 5 - Start Up For models JGH:E:K:T
Compressor Cylinders and Operating Conditions

Inlet Disc.
Bore Inlet Disc.
Cylinder Stage Throw Serial Pres. Pres.
Dia. In. Temp. °F Temp °F
Class Number Number Number psig psig
(mm) (°C) (°C)
(barg) (barg)
________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Cylinder Lubricant Make and Grade:______________________________________________
Documentation and Accessories

Check all items included in the shipment:
Maintenance and Repair Manual Recommended Spares List
Yes No Yes No
Start-Up Spare Parts Unit Start and Stop Procedures
Yes No Yes No
Toolbox w/Ariel Tools Toolbox with Hydraulic Tools (optional)
Yes No Yes No
Unit Parts List Toolbox with SAE Hand Tools (optional)
Yes No Yes No
Commissioning Agent
Name:_______________________ Company:_____________________________________
Address:___________________________________________________________________
City:_______________________________________ State:_______ Zip:________________
Country:_______________________
Phone:_________________________ Email:_____________________________________
REV: 07/19 Page 5-3 of 10

START-UP CHECK LIST - ITEMS TO CHECK IN THE FIELD AT COMMISSIONING
Description Date Checked Date Verified
1. Check and verify the top cover data plate of the compressor Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
frame for compressor design limitations such as rod load, maxi- ________________ ________________
mum and minimum speed, and maximum lube oil temperature.
2. Check and verify the availability of correct start-up spares, Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
hand tools, special tools, compressor parts list and drawings, ________________ ________________
and technical manuals at installation.
3. Check and verify the Ariel lube sheet and Lubrication Spe- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
cification matches the recommended oil grade and viscosity for ________________ ________________
the service.
4. Check and verify all lube oil piping cleanliness per Ariel lub- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
rication specifications (see “Oil System Cleanliness” on page 3- ________________ ________________
11).
5. Verify lube oil storage and supply line cleanliness per “Oil Sys- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
tem Cleanliness” on page 3-11). Verify crankcase oil supply isol- ________________ ________________
ation valve is open.
6. Verify pre-lube piping cleanliness per “Oil System Cleanliness” Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
on page 3-11) and correct circuit operation. ________________ ________________
7. Verify there is an oil cooler and high temperature shutdown for Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
the oil into the compressor frame. ________________ ________________
8. Verify whether the temperature control valve installation is Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
blending or diverting (blending preferred). _________________ ________________ ________________
9. Check compressor crankcase oil level controller for proper Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
installation, operation, levelness, and venting. ________________ ________________
10. If applicable, check cooling water circuit cleanliness for the Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
oil cooler and cooled packing per Maintenance and Repair ________________ ________________
Manual. Verify correct routing and test pump rotation. Set pres-
sure appropriately per Maintenance and Repair Manual and leak
test.
11. Verify correct filter element installation. Prime the oil filter ele- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
ment and all lube oil piping with oil. ________________ ________________
12. Verify proper compressor crankcase oil level before starting Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
(about 7/8 full in site glass). ________________ ________________
13. Verify correct installation of a low oil pressure shutdown Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
tubed to the downstream side of the oil filter. ________________ ________________
14. Operate pre-lube system. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:

________________ ________________
Page 5-4 of 10 REV: 07/19

15. OPTIONAL STEP: Record “out of plane” readings (pre-grout) - see Appendix H - ER-82.
_________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________

Drive End _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ Auxiliary
End
Flatness measuring device Manufacturer / Model:____________________________________

Date of last calibration:_____________________ Calibration Due:_______________________
Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
________________ ________________
16. Record soft foot readings. Over 0.002 inches (0.05 mm) pull-down on any frame foot requires correction.
_________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________

Drive End _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ Auxiliary
End
Commissioning Agent: Distributor:

________________ ________________
17. Check crosshead guide shimming for correct pre-load and Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
hold down bolt torque. ________________ ________________
18. Record piston end clearances with feeler gages (see Maintenance and Repair Manual, Appendix B).
Throw 1 2 3 4 5 6
Head End ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________
Crank End ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________
NOTE: Pre-lube compressor before turning crankshaft. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:

________________ ________________
19. Measure and record rod runout (see Maintenance and Repair Manual for maximum acceptable readings).
Throw 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vertical:
Piston @ CE __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________
Mid-Stroke __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________
Piston @ HE __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________
Horizontal:
Piston @ CE __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________
Mid-Stroke __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________
Piston @ HE __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________
NOTE: Pre-lube compressor before turning crankshaft. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:

________________ ________________
REV: 07/19 Page 5-5 of 10

20. Measure crosshead clearances with cylinders mounted. To Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
check top, insert 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) wide feelers from one side ________________ ________________
edge across to the opposite side, at both ends. See Maintenance
and Repair Manual, Appendix B for limits. To check bottom,
insert a 0.0015 inch (0.038 mm) feeler at the four corners; feeler
should insert no more than 0.50 (13 mm). Record values:
Throw Top Min. Top Max. Bottom Max. (Corners)

1 _________ _________ _________
2 _________ _________ _________
3 _________ _________ _________
4 _________ _________ _________
5 _________ _________ _________
6 _________ _________ _________
21. For electric motor drivers, check and verify the motor shaft is Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
set at its magnetic center before positioning axial clearance. ________________ ________________
With the coupling disconnected, check and verify driver rotation
matches the compressor rotation arrow.
22. Check coupling bolt torque to coupling manufacturer Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
recommendations. ________________ ________________
23. Check and verify compressor to driver alignment (installed on Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
site, cold). Record dial indicator readings in inches (mm) at the 3, ________________ ________________
6, 9 and 12 o’clock positions or attach alignment tool print-out.
If using a laser alignment tool, make a print out and attach it to

this document.
24. Check and verify compressor crankshaft thrust clearance. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
The shaft should remain stationary after thrusting each direction ________________ ________________
(see Appendix B).
_______________________ ________________________
Page 5-6 of 10 REV: 07/19

START-UP CHECK LIST - PROCESS PIPING VENTS AND DRAINS
1. Verify the bottle and process pipe installation contains no bolt Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
bound flanges or elevation differences that may stress the com- ________________ ________________
pressor cylinders
2. Verify cold adjustment of any bottle or cylinder supports. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
________________ ________________
3. Verify correct inlet screen orientation in process piping. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
________________ ________________
4. Check and verify vents and drains of the primary and sec- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
ondary packing-case and the crosshead distance piece are open ________________ ________________
and tubed to a safe atmosphere.
5. Check and verify safety relief valve installation to protect cyl- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
inders, piping, and cooler for each compression stage. ________________ ________________
6. Record method of suction pressure control and valve size. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
________________________ ________________________ ________________ ________________
7. Check and verify crankcase breather element is open to atmo- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
sphere and clean. ________________ ________________
8. Check and verify torque to spec on all gas containment and Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
other fasteners where loosening may result in a safety hazard or ________________ ________________
equipment failure including: gas nozzle flanges, valve caps, cyl-
inder heads, compressor rod packing, and crosshead guide sup-
port. See Appendix A.
START-UP CHECK LIST - INSTRUMENTATION
1. Check and verify the set point for the high compressor oil tem- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
perature shutdown at 190°F (88°C) maximum. ________________ ________________
2. Check and verify proper vibration shutdown installation and Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
operation. Record alarm and shut down settings. ________________ ________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
3. Verify operation of suction, inter-stage, and discharge pres- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
sure shutdowns. Record alarm and shutdown settings. ________________ ________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
4. Check, verify, and record the over speed setting: __________ Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
________________ ________________
REV: 07/19 Page 5-7 of 10

START-UP CHECK LIST - FORCE FEED LUBRICATION SYSTEM
1. Check and verify force feed lubricator box for proper oil level. Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
________________ ________________
2. Prime the force feed lubrication system through the purge port Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
at the force feed pump discharge manifold. Check and verify ________________ ________________
each tube connection for tightness.
3. Check and verify operation of force feed lubrication system no Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
flow shutdowns. ________________ ________________
4. Record color of force feed blow out discs (see TABLE 3-3 for Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
disc ratings): _____________________________ ________________ ________________
If fitted with an ARV, verify the cracking pressure marked on the
relief valve and the pin indicator color match the lube sheet spe-
cification.
5. Check, verify, and record recommended lube feed rates from Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
lubricator data plate or “Parts Book” Cylinder Lubrication sheet. ________________ ________________
____________________________________________________
FINAL PRE-START CHECK LIST
1. Operate pre-lube system. Record pre-lube pressure:________ Commissioning Agent: Distributor:

________________ ________________
2. For engine driven units, disable ignition and roll the engine with Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
the starter to check and verify the compressor rolls freely. Check ________________ ________________
and verify oil pressure increases noticeably while rolling on the
starter.
3. For electric motors, bar the compressor over manually to Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
check and verify it rolls freely. ________________ ________________
4. For machines compressing a combustible gas, purge the Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
entire system including the piping, by-pass, recycle line, and ________________ ________________
compressor cylinders of all air.
5. Review start-up instructions for all other package com- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
ponents. ________________ ________________
6. Complete the required review of the Start-Up and Operating Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
Instructions for the unit with the unit operator. ________________ ________________
INITIAL POST START-UP CHECK LIST
1. Check and verify immediate oil pressure increase. Enable oil Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
pressure shutdown and bearing temperature shutdowns. Record ________________ ________________
initial pressure at operating speed.____________________
Page 5-8 of 10 REV: 07/19

INITIAL POST START-UP CHECK LIST
2. Check and verify oil filter pressure gauges. Record initial dif- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
ferential: ________________________________________ ________________ ________________
3. Check and verify the low oil pressure shutdown is active and Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
set at 45 psig (3.1 barg). ________________ ________________
4. Check and verify lube oil pressure set at 50 to 60 psig (3.5 to Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
4.2 barg) at operating speed and temperature (see “ - Main- ________________ ________________
tenance” on page 3-1). Record final setting:__________
5. Record oil filter maximum differential reference value listed on Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
the compressor top cover filter data plate: _________________ ________________ ________________
6. Listen and feel for any strange noises or vibration in the com- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
pressor or piping. Record any occurrences. ________________ ________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
7. Check and verify high discharge gas temperature shutdowns Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
are set about 10% above normal operating temperature (350 °F ________________ ________________
(177 °C) maximum) and functioning.
8. Check and verify distribution block cycle time indicator and set Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
lubricator pump for proper break-in rate. ________________ ________________
9. Check and verify the unit and piping is free from any gas or Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
fluid leaks. Record any occurrences. ________________ ________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
10. Check and verify scrubber high level shutdowns operation Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
and check scrubber dumps operation and frequency. ________________ ________________
11. Check, verify, and record tank levels that indicate the amount Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
of liquids removed from the gas. ___________________ ________________ ________________
12. Check and verify piston rod packings seal properly in the Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
primary packing vents. ________________ ________________
13. Check and verify operation of all safety functions to ensure Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
unit shutdown upon indication. ________________ ________________
14. If applicable, check and verify main bearing temperatures and Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
record. Watch for even bearing temperature increase. ________________ ________________
15. During various operational conditions, use the Ariel per- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
formance program to check and verify operational characteristics ________________ ________________
of various load steps.
REV: 07/19 Page 5-9 of 10

24-HOUR POST START-UP CHECK LIST
1. Record "hot" alignment readings after reaching normal oper- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
ating temperatures and components become heat soaked. Shut- ________________ ________________
down and vent gas system. Within 30 minutes and while
components are still hot, record dial indicator readings in inches
(mm) at the 3, 6, 9 and 12 o’clock positions on lines provided
below:
If using a laser alignment tool, make a print out and attach it to

this document.
2. If using a discharge bottle or head end cylinder supports, Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
adjust when components are heat soaked to ensure no excess- ________________ ________________
ive forces exist to cause detrimental cylinder deflection.
3. Check and verify torque on gas nozzle flange, valve cap, cyl- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
inder head, compressor rod packing flange, and guide to frame ________________ ________________
bolting.
4. Verify inlet screens are clean by monitoring differential pres- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:
sure across the screen. If differential pressure is unavailable, a ________________ ________________
visual inspection may be required. Remove and replace dam-
aged inlet screens. Clean inlet screens regularly to avoid
increased pressure that may collapse them. More debris in the
screen may dictate more frequent inspections.
5. Complete Ariel’s “Compressor Warranty Notification - Install- Commissioning Agent: Distributor:

ation List Data” (pages 5-1 and 5-2). ________________ ________________
Page 5-10 of 10 REV: 07/19

Section 6 - Compressor Troubleshooting
Expect minor problems during routine operation of an Ariel compressor. These troubles most often
trace to liquid, dirt, improper adjustment, or operators unfamiliar with Ariel compressors. These
difficulties can usually be corrected by cleaning, proper adjustment, elimination of an adverse condition,
part replacement, or proper training.
Major problems usually trace to long periods of operation with unsuitable lubrication, careless
operation, lack of routine maintenance, or using the compressor for purposes not intended.
Recording inter-stage pressures and temperatures on multistage units is valuable. Any variation when
operating at a given load point indicates trouble in one of the stages. Normally, a decrease in inter-
stage pressure indicates trouble in the lower pressure cylinder. An increase usually indicates trouble in
the higher pressure cylinder. Below is a list of common problems and possible causes.
Problem Possible Causes
Low Oil Pressure l Oil pump pressure regulating valve set too low or sticking.
l Oil pump or oil pump drive failure.
l Oil foaming from counterweights striking oil surface (oil level in sight glass
too high), or from vortex at strainer inlet (oil level in sight glass too low), or
from leaks in pump suction line.
l Cold oil.
l Dirty oil filter.
l Interior frame oil leaks.
l Excessive leakage at bearings.
l Improper low oil pressure switch setting.
l Oil pump relief valve set too low.
l Defective pressure gauge.
l Plugged oil sump strainer.
l Improper end clearance in oil pump.
High/Low Suction Pressure l Suction control valve malfunction.

l Faulty pressure gauges.
l Frozen/plugged inlet line.
l Plugged intake screen or filter.
l Scrubber dump valve stuck open.
l Recycle malfunction.
l Site production equipment problems.
High/Low Inter-Stage l Faulty valves or rings.

Pressure l Gas leak.
l Frozen cooler section or tubing to panel.
l Faulty pressure gauges.
l Scrubber dump valve stuck open.
l Load change.
Noise in Cylinder l Loose piston.

l Piston hitting cylinder head end head or crank end head.
l Loose crosshead balance nut.
l Broken or leaking valve(s).
l Worn or broken piston rings or wear bands.
l Valve improperly seated or damaged seat gasket.
l Liquids in cylinder.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Section 6 - Compressor Troubleshooting
Frame Knocks l Loose crosshead pin or pin caps.

l Loose or worn main, crankpin, or crosshead bearings.
l Low oil pressure.
l Cold oil.
l Incorrect oil.
l Knock is actually from cylinder end.
l Low fluid level in damper.
Excessive Carbon on Valves l Excessive lube oil.

l Improper lube oil.
l Oil carry-over from inlet system or previous stage.
l Broken or leaking valves causing high temperature.
l Excessive temperature due to high pressure ratio across cylinders.
Relief Valve Popping l Faulty relief valve.

l Leaking suction valves or rings on next higher stage.
l Obstruction, closed or faulty valve in discharge line.
High Discharge Temperature l Excessive ratio across cylinder due to leaking inlet valves or rings on next
higher stage.
l Fouled inter-cooler piping.
l Leaking discharge valves or piston rings.
l High inlet temperature.
l Improper lube oil and/or lube rate.
High Frame Oil Temperature l Faulty temperature gauge.

l Dirty oil filters.
l High oil level.
l Faulty thermostatic element.
l Faulty thermostatic control valve.
l Clogged or blocked oil cooler.
l Binding or tightness in the compressor.
Packing Over Heating l Lubrication failure.

l Improper lube oil and/or insufficient lube rate.
l Worn packing rings.
l Dirt in packing.
l Improper ring side or end gap clearance.
l Scored, tapered or out of round piston rod.
l Excessive piston rod runout.
Excessive Packing Leakage l Worn packing rings.

l Improper lube oil and or insufficient lube rate.
l Dirt in packing.
l Packing rings assembled incorrectly.
l Improper ring side or end gap clearance.
l Plugged packing vent system.
l Scored, tapered or out of round piston rod.
l Excessive piston rod runout.
l Packing not seated or properly run in.
Drive End of Crankshaft Oil l Clogged vent or vent piping.

Leaks l Excessive cylinder packing leakage.
Piston Rod Oil Wiper Leaks l Worn wiper rings.

l Wipers incorrectly assembled.
l Worn/scored rod.
l Improper fit of rings to rod/side clearance.
Page 6-2 of 5 REV: 07/19

Section 6 - Compressor Troubleshooting For models JGH:E:K:T
Force Feed Lubrication l Force feed pump or lubricator block failure.

Shutdown l Loss of oil supply to force feed pump.
l Lubricator drive failure.
l DNFT not programmed correctly.
l DNFT battery failure or power loss.
l Loose or grounded control wiring.
l Pin assembly not completely pushed into the DNFT housing.
Oil Leaks at Pipe Threaded l Joint not tight.

Connections l Pipe sealant was omitted.
l Defective or damaged pipe threads.
l NPTF Dryseal threads not being used.
l Pressure too high for pipe threaded connection use.
l Pipe thread sealant incompatible with the synthetic oil used.
l Cracked pipe or fittings.
Vibration Shutdown l Short in wire to panel.

l Incorrectly positioned vibration switch.
l Loose mounting bolts.
l High scrubber level (liquid carry-over).
l Broken valve, piston, or piston rod.
l Main drive-line or coupling failure.
Piston Rod Runout Correction
FIGURE 6-1 Piston Rod Runout Measurement
Piston rod runout may be either positive or negative. A positive reading indicates the piston drops as it
moves to the head end of the cylinder due to the clearance in the bore. As the piston drops, the rod
rises, yielding a positive reading on the indicator. If the cylinder is not supported properly, it could droop
causing the piston to drop as it moves to the head end of the cylinder. A negative reading indicates the
piston climbs as it moves to the head end of the cylinder. When the piston climbs, the rod drops, yielding
a negative reading. Any reading outside the Ariel rod runout tolerance requires correction for safe,
efficient compressor operation (see Appendix B ). Piston rod runout correction first requires verification
(and correction, if needed) of the crosshead clearance. See flowcharts below.
REV: 07/19 Page 6-3 of 5

For models JGH:E:K:T Section 6 - Compressor Troubleshooting
FIGURE 6-2 Crosshead Clearance Verification/Correction Flowchart
Page 6-4 of 5 REV: 07/19

Section 6 - Compressor Troubleshooting For models JGH:E:K:T
FIGURE 6-3 Piston Rod Runout Verification/Correction Flowchart
REV: 07/19 Page 6-5 of 5

Appendix A - Ariel Fasteners and
Torques
This document lists fastener lubrication and torque requirements for proper assembly of JGH:E:K:T
reciprocating compressors. For older units with lower specified torque values, do not assume higher
values without consulting the packager and/or Ariel.
l Use only Ariel specified fasteners TABLE A-1 Fastener Thread & Seating Surface Lubrication
tightened to the correct torque.
NOTE: Lubricate all fasteners both under the head and on the threads.
l Connecting rod, valve cap, and Application Lubricant
suction/discharge nozzle (Ariel l Frame: jack screws Never-Seez Regular
supplied flange) fasteners are l Steel Cylinders: valve cap, cylinder Grade
modified to prevent fatigue; do not mounting flange to cylinder body, packing,
replace them with standard cap crank end and head end head, gas passage
screws. For questions about l Pistons: piston nuts, set screws, piston
collar, crosshead threads, tandem piston to
replacing other fasteners with piston rod
standard cap screws, contact your l All stainless steel fasteners
packager or Ariel.
Connecting rod cap Lubriplate 630-AA
l Clean and de-burr all threads. Crosshead balance nut Under the head or
Frame to spacer bar mating surface:
l Do not use molybdenum disulfide Mineral oil (ISO 100-
lubricants. 150). On the threads:
Never-Seez Regular
l Do not use Never-Seez for fastener
Grade.
lubrication unless specified or
excessive stresses may result with All pipe threads Loctite 567
specified torques. See TABLE A-1. Fasteners specified with Loctite on threads Use Loctite only with no
additional lube
l Use anti-seize lubricants sparingly;
All other fasteners, all O-rings and stat-o-seals Mineral oil
excessive amounts cause oil (ISO 100-150)
analysis to indicate contamination
and may unnecessarily increase
maintenance costs.
l Re-preserve any fasteners subject to corrosion after installation.
FIGURE A-1 Bolt Head Grade and Material Identification
CAUTION: To replace a fastener, see parts list for fastener grade and part number. Do
not use a lesser or greater material grade. Use Ariel parts to replace special fasteners
and fasteners with reduced body diameter for fatigue resistance. Do not torque
fasteners with compressor running or pressurized. Read technical manual safety
warnings.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix A - Ariel Fasteners and Torques
Recommendations for Torque Accuracy

1. Qualified personnel must use a properly calibrated torque wrench to correctly torque fasteners. Do
not break fasteners loose with a torque wrench; it may overload the wrench and affect accuracy.
Determine torque wrench accuracy range - most are not accurate over their entire range.
2. Clean and de-burr all threads before assembly. Ensure no
oil or debris is in the bottom of the bolt hole when installing
bolts. Apply oil only to fasteners, not in the bolt hole.
3. For Ariel pressure containing components: For
fasteners arranged in a circle, tighten opposing pairs in a
criss-cross pattern. For 3-bolt valve caps, tighten in this
pattern: 1-2-3, 2-3-1, 3-1-2. Use the pattern to close the
joint without exceeding 25% of full torque. Repeat the
pattern for 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of full torque.
Repeat the 100% torque until fasteners stop moving.
4. For main bearing cap and connecting rod cap
fasteners: If the bearing cap is stamped with torque FIGURE A-2 Torque Patterns
pattern numbers, tighten fasteners in that pattern. If not
stamped, follow the FIGURE A-2 pattern.
l Where torque and turn IS NOT USED: Do not exceed 50% of final torque to close joint. Once
closed, apply 100% of final torque in the same pattern. Repeat 100% torque until fasteners stop
moving.
l Where torque and turn IS USED: Apply 100% of pre-torque to close joint. Repeat 100%
torque until fasteners stop moving. Finally, apply the full turn value to each fastener once in the
same pattern.
5. Always apply a steady, slow force to a torque wrench, and stop immediately when the wrench clicks.
Do not bounce, jerk, or double tap the wrench - it increases the set torque significantly. Perform final
tightening with a torque wrench.
6. When finished, reset torque wrench to its lowest setting to relax the spring. A torque wrench left in a
high setting stresses the spring and decreases accuracy with time.
7. To determine the torque wrench setting when using a torque multiplier, divide the desired fastener
torque by the multiplier actual mechanical advantage, not the design mechanical advantage. See
manufacturer documentation for multiplier.
8. If using an offset adapter with a torque wrench,
the torque setting is not the actual torque
applied, unless the adapter is 90° to the torque
wrench. To determine the correct torque setting:
Tw = Ta x [L ÷ (L + A)]
Tw = Torque wrench setting, Lb x Ft or
N·m.
FIGURE A-3 Torque Wrench with Angled Adapter
Ta = Torque required at fastener, Lb x Ft or
N·m.
L = Length of wrench, ft or m (from square drive end to center point of force on handle).
A = Wrench length added by adapter, ft or m (measured to end of adapter on a line parallel to
wrench center line).
Page A-2 of 6 REV: 07/19

Appendix A - Ariel Fasteners and Torques For models JGH:E:K:T
TABLE A-2 Hoerbiger Valve Assembly Fastener Torques
Nominal Size Torque

Fastener Type
Inch - TPI Lb x Ft (N·m), unless specified
Center Cap Screw a 5/16 - 24 12 Point - Steel Grade 5 14 (19)

Material Parts: SPL3 & 4
3/8 - 24 24 (33)
7/16 - 20 35 (48)
5/16 - 24 12 Point - Steel Grade 5 22 (30)
Material Parts: SPL or SPL5
3/8 - 24 40 (54)
7/16 - 20 65 (88)
5/16 - 24 12 Point - Stainless Steel 14 (19)
Grade B8M
3/8 - 24 24 (33)
Material Parts: SPL6
7/16 - 20 35 (48)
Peripheral Cap Screw #10 - 32 Hex Socket Head 25 Lb x In (2.8)
#12 - 28 43 Lb x In (4.9)
1/4 - 20 110 Lb x In (12)
5/16 - 18 176 Lb x In (20)
3/8 - 16 21 (28)
Single-piece Lock Nuts Nominal Size Torque Lb x Ft (N·m), unless specified
(Greer, Flexloc, Selflock)
Inch - TPI SPLb Other
#12 - 28 96 Lb x In. (11) d -
5/16 - 24 15 (20) 109 Lb x In (12)
(Microlock, Spiralockb) 3/8 - 24 26 (35) 17 (23)

7/16 - 20 48 (65) 26 (35)
1/2 - 20 67 (91) 41 (55)
5/8 - 18 110 (150) 82 (110)
3/4 - 16 195 (265) 145 (195)
7/8 - 14 295 (400) 230 (310)
Center Stud Drake Inch - TPI Bottom Half Top Half
2-Piece Beam Lock Nut
1/4 - 28 103 Lb x In (12) 66 Lb x In (7.5)
Top Half 5/16 - 24 120 Lb x In (14) 66 Lb x In (7.5)
3/8 - 24 16 (22) 96 Lb x In (11)

c
1/2 - 20 36 (49) 20 (27)
5/8 - 18 73 (99) 40 (54)
3/4 - 16 130 (175) 70 (95)
Bottom Half 7/8 - 14 210 (285) 115 (155)

a. Center cap screw valve assemblies have Spiralock® (SPL) threads to prevent loosening. See bottom of valve assembly for SPL material
parts number (3, 4, 5 or 6) and select proper torque from the table. Lubricate both threads and seating surfaces with a petroleum type
lubricant ONLY. If using older valve assemblies not covered in the table, see the original torque chart provided in the compressor tool
box, or contact Ariel for instructions. Spiralock® threads cannot be dressed with a standard tap. Clean center cap screws in valve
assemblies not marked SPL with Loctite safety solvent and lock them with one or two drops of Loctite #272 thread locking compound.
DO NOT use petroleum lubricants.
b. Microlock and Spiralock nuts are marked "SPL" on one of the flats.
c. Use 29 (39) for 1/2 - 20 bottom half Drake lock nut with non-metallic valve plates in liftwasher valves.
d. Use this torque only with a 17-4PH 900H material center stud.
REV: 07/19 Page A-3 of 6

TABLE A-3 JGH:E:K:T Fastener Torques
Torque
Nominal Size
Fastener Type Lb x Ft (N·m), unless
Inch - TPI
specified
Main Bearing Cap - Cap Screw 7/8 - 9 12 Point - Grade 8 280 (380)
Connecting Rod Cap - Cap Screw 7/8 - 14 12 Point - Grade 8 80 (108) + 90°
1” - 14 See ER-124
Torsional Vibration Detuner - Cap Screw 1” - 14 12 Point - Grade 8 530 (715)
Crankshaft Flange to Nut Plate (JGE:K:T/6) 1/2 - 20 12 Point - Grade 8 46 (62)
Crosshead Pin Thru Cap Screw - Lock Nut 1/2 - 20 Hex - Nylon Insert 61 (83)
Frame to Spacer Bar - Cap Screw 1-1/8 - 12 12 Point - Grade 8 560 (760)
Crosshead Guide to Frame - Cap Screw 7/8 - 9 12 Point - Grade 8 280 (380)
Crosshead Guide to Cylinder 5/8 - 11 12 Point - Grade 8 97 (130)
7/8 - 9 280 (380)
7/8 - 14 Hex Nut 315 (425)
Crosshead Guide to Support - Cap Screw 7/8 - 9 Hex - Grade 9 255 (345)
12 Point - Grade 8
1” - 8 380 (515)
Head End Cylinder Support to Cylinder 1/2 - 13 Hex - Grade 8 44 (60)
5/8 - 11 88 (120)
3/4 - 10 160 (215)
7/8 - 9 255 (345)
Eccentric Vernier Cap - Cap Screw 5/16 - 18 12 Point or Hex Grade 8 Hand Wrench Tight
Idler Sprocket Thru Cap Screw - Lock Nut 1/2 - 20 Hex - Prevailing 41 (55)
5/8 - 18 82 (110)
External Thrust Bearing Adapter to Crankshaft - Cap 1/2 - 20 12 Point - Grade 8 66 (90)
Screw
Rod Packing - Cap Screw b 3/4 - 10 12 Point 125 (170)
Grade 8 or 17-4PH
3/4 - 16 145 (195)
7/8 - 14 230 (310)
Packing Tie Rod - Nut #10 - 24 Hex 20 Lb x In. (2.3)
1/4 - 20 72 Lb x In. (8.1)
Rod Catcher to Packing 1/2 - 20 12 Pt - Grade 8/17-4PH 51 (69)
Piston Nut 1-5/8 - 12 Ariel Design 1590 (2150) c
Piston Nut Set Screw 5/16 - 24 Socket Head 164 Lb x In. (19) d
Crosshead Balance Nut 1-3/4 - 12 Ariel Design Slugging Method e
Force Feed Lube Box - Bearing Housing 1-3/8 - 20 - LH Bearing Housing 70 (95)
Force Feed Lube Box - Jam Nut 1” - 14 Hex 75 (100)
1-1/2 - 12 112 (152)
Force Feed Lube Pump Mounting 1/4 - 20 Hex - Grade 5 50 Lb x In (5.6)
f
Auto Relief Valve 1/2 Ariel Design 75 Lb x In (8.5)
Auto Relief Valve Manifold Plug #10 - 24 Ariel Design 50 Lb x In (5.6)
1/4 NPT Hex Hand Wrench Tight
Roller Thrust Bearing Retainer Clamp Cap Screw 3/4 - 16 Ariel Design 160 (215)

Appendix A - Ariel Fasteners and Torques For models JGH:E:K:T
Torque
Nominal Size
Inch - TPI
specified
Rupture Disk - Blow-Out Fitting Cap 1/4 Nom. Tube Hex - Tube Fitting 40 Lb x In. (4.5)
Flywheel to Hub 1” - 8 12 Point - Grade 8 460 (620)
1” - 14 530 (715)
Piston Rod Oil Slinger Bolt - Lock Nut 1/4 - 28 Hex Jam - Prevailing 95 Lb x In. (11)
Valve Cap Assembly - Cap Nut 7/8 - 14 Cap Nut Hand Wrench Tight
1" - 14
1-1/8 - 12
Valve Cap Seal Keeper - Cap Screw 5/16 - 18 12 Point - 17-4PH 120 Lb x In. (14)
Cylinder Mounting Flange to Forged 1” - 14 12 Pt - Grade 8/17-4PH 485 (660)
Steel Cylinder or Hex Grade 9
1-1/4 - 12 955 (1290)
Frame Foot & Crosshead Guide Foot 1-1/8 - 7 Hex Nut 600 (810) g
Hold Down
Crankshaft Flange to Flywheel or Coupling Adapter - 1” - 14 12 Point - Grade 8 530 (715)
Drive End
Flywheel to Crankshaft, Aux. End - Cap Screw 3/4 - 16 12 Point - Grade 8 215 (295)
Lifting Bracket to Frame JGE:K:T/6 1-1/4 - 7 12 Point - Grade 8 690 (935)
Fenner Drive A-7352 1-1/4 Hex 100 (140)
h
Cap Screw 3/8 - 16 Hex - Grade 8 or 9 193 Lb x In (22)
l Valve Cap or
1/2 - 13 40 (54)
l Cylinder Head 12 Point
l Gas Passage Cap 5/8 -11 Grade 8 or 17-4PH 79 (105)
l VVCP or eVCP Adapter to Head i 5/8 -18 92 (125)
l VVCP, FVCP, or eVCP to Cylinder
3/4 - 10 140 (190)
l Ariel supplied companion flanges, except “Peanut”
Dual Nozzle 3/4 - 16 160 (215)
7/8 - 9 230 (310)
7/8 -14 260 (350)
1” - 8 345 (465)
1” - 14 395 (535)
1-1/8 - 12 560 (760)
1-1/4 - 12 780 (1060)
ANSI Flange to Cylinder Nozzle See Cylinder Provided by Packager See ER-127.
Outline
Unloader Actuator to Valve Cap - Cap Screw 1/2 - 13 Hex - Grade 8 48 (65)
Companion Flange “Peanut” Dual Nozzle 1/2 - 13 12 Pt 53 (71)
Grade 8/17-4PH
Tandem Cylinder to Cylinder - Cap Screw h 1/2 - 13 Hex - Grade 8 or 9 44 (60)
or
5/8 - 11 88 (120)
12 Point
3/4 - 10 Grade 8 or 17-4PH 160 (215)
3/4 - 16 180 (245)
1-1/8 - 12 620 (840)
j
Tandem Piston to Piston Rod - Cap Screw 5/8 - 18 12 Point - Grade 8 92 (125)
REV: 07/19 Page A-5 of 6

Torque
Nominal Size
Inch - TPI
specified
Seating Studs in Cylinder 3/8 - 16 Dog Point 107 Lb x In (12)
Grade 8 or 17-4PH
1/2 - 13 22 (30)
NOTE: In valve cap assemblies with a spring
energized seal, install longer studs with Loctite 242. 5/8 - 11 44 (60)
3/4 - 10 79 (105)
3/4 - 16 90 (120)
7/8 - 9 130 (175)
7/8 - 14 145 (195)
1” and larger 200 (270)
Distribution Block Tie Rod - Nut 1/4 - 28 Hex 68 Lb x In. (7.7)
Distribution Block Divider Valve - Cap Screw 1/4 - 28 Socket Head 75 Lb x In. (8.5) k
Grade 5 - Hex Cap Screw ALL Hex - Grade 5 Hand Wrench Tight
a. Torque opposing pairs of fasteners incrementally until all reach full torque.
b. Repeat final torque for rod packing bolts until they no longer turn before the torque wrench clicks.
c. Or use 3500 psig (241 barg) hydraulic pressure and 50 (68) torque on pinion drive with separately purchased piston rod hydraulic
tensioning tool. Or use 3500 psig (241 barg) hydraulic pressure and 200 (270) torque on spanner with piston rod tensioning tool (A-
24512). Tighten, loosen, then re-tighten piston nut to ensure proper torque.
d. Or tighten set screw 15° past the Allen wrench yield point. Discard deformed wrench, and use a new Allen wrench to tighten the other set
screw. Stake set screws per manual after tightening
e. Or use 3500 psig (241 barg) hydraulic pressure on separately purchased crosshead (balance) nut torquing tool.
f. "1/2" indicates the wrench size. Auto relief valve can swivel in the manifold once torqued. See assembly drawing.
g. Minimum torque to stress recommended 1-1/8 - 7 hold-down stud to 55,000 psi (380 MPa). Use studs with an ultimate strength of
100,000 psi (690 MPa) or greater. If greater, increase torque stress to about 55% of ultimate strength, as specified by packager.
h. For studs specified for cylinder applications, tighten nuts to the same torque as cap screws in similar applications.
i. Excludes socket head cap screws, which are installed hand wrench tight.
j. Tighten, loosen, then re-tighten to ensure proper torque.
k. Step-torque first to 40 Lb x In. (4.5 N•m), and then to 75 Lb x In. (8.5 N•m).

Appendix B - Clearances
TABLE B-1 JGH:E:K:T Frame and Running Gear Clearances, in. (mm)
Description Clearance
Crankshaft Dust Seal JGH:E:K:T/2/4 (Feeler Gauge - Centered) 0.008 to 0.010 (0.20 to 0.25)
Crankshaft Dust Seal JGE:K:T/6 (Feeler Gauge - Centered) 0.010 to 0.018 (0.25 to 0.46)
Crankshaft Thrust JGH:E:K:T/2/4 (End) 0.0085 to 0.0200 (0.216 to 0.508)
Crankshaft Thrust JGE:K:T/6 (End) 0.014 to 0.033 (0.356 to 0.838)
Crankshaft Journal Bearing (Jack) 0.0015 to 0.0050 (0.038 to 0.127)
Connecting Rod Bearing (Jack) 0.0035 to 0.0070 (0.089 to 0.178)
Connecting Rod Thrust (Side) 0.007 to 0.018 (0.178 to 0.457)
Connecting Rod Bushing to Crosshead Pin 0.002 to 0.004 (0.05 to 0.10)
Crosshead (Ductile and ADI Iron) Bronze Bushing to Crosshead Pin 0.0020 to 0.0042 (0.05 to 0.11)
Crosshead (Gray Iron) to Crosshead Pin (JGH) 0.0020 to 0.0035 (0.05 to 0.09)
Crosshead (Bronze) to Crosshead Pin (JGH) 0.0020 to 0.0035 (0.05 to 0.09)
Crosshead (Babbitted Gray and Ductile Iron) to Guide (Feeler Gauge) 0.008 to 0.013 (0.20 to 0.33)
Crosshead (Babbitted ADI Iron) to Guide (Feeler Gauge) 0.009 to 0.014 (0.23 to 0.36)
Crosshead (Babbitted Bronze) to Guide (Feeler Gauge) 0.011 to 0.016 (0.28 to 0.41)
TABLE B-2 JGH:E:K:T Piston End Clearances, in. (mm) a, b
Crank
Cylinder Class Head End Total
End
22-1/2 E:ET:H 0.050 (1.3) 0.070 to 0.130 (1.8 to 0.120 to 0.180 (3.0 to 4.6)
3.3)
All other E:ET:H 0.040 (1.0) 0.050 to 0.110 (1.3 to 0.090 to 0.150 (2.3 to 3.8)
2.8)
17-7/8, 20-1/8, 22, 24-1/8, and 26-1/2 0.055 (1.4) 0.095 to 0.155 (2.4 to 0.150 to 0.210 (3.8 to 5.3)
K:T 3.9)
5-3/8 K:T Tandem 0.040 (1.0) 0.060 to 0.160 (1.5 to 0.100 to 0.200 (2.5 to 5.1)
4.1)
All KL:TL 0.300 (7.6) No Set 0.620 to 0.680 (15.7 to

17.3)
All KM:TM and all other K:T 0.040 (1.0) 0.080 to 0.140 (2.0 to 0.120 to 0.180 (3.0 to 4.6)
3.6)
a. Measured clearances may not agree because of oil films, assembly tolerances, wear, etc. Do not use plastigages, solder, etc.
b. If total piston end clearance is not within table tolerance, contact your Packager or Ariel.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix B - Clearances
TABLE B-3 New Uncut Packing Ring Side TABLE B-4 New Pressure Breaker and
Clearance, in. (mm), (BTUU/CUU/BTU/CU/STU) Segmented Packing Ring Side Clearance, in.
(mm), (BTR/BTS/CR/BD/BT/TR/P/UP/P1U)
Actual Groove Width Side Clearance
Actual Groove Width Side Clearance
0.572 to 0.574 0.023 to 0.028
(14.53 to 14.58) (0.58 to 0.71) 0.375 to 0.377 0.011 to 0.015
(9.52 to 9.58) (0.28 to 0.38)
0.625 to 0.627 0.025 to 0.030
(15.88 to 15.93) (0.64 to 0.76) 0.447 to 0.449 0.013 to 0.018
(11.35 to 11.40) (0.33 to 0.46)
0.750 to 0.752 0.030 to 0.035
(19.05 to 19.10) (0.76 to 0.89) 0.572 to 0.574 0.017 to 0.022
(14.53 to 14.58) (0.43 to 0.56)
0.625 to 0.627 0.019 to 0.024

(15.88 to 15.93) (0.48 to 0.61)
TABLE B-5 New Wiper Ring Side

Clearance, in. (mm)
Wiper Ring Type Side Clearance
2RWS, 2RUG 0.004 to 0.006

(0.010 to 0.015)
3RWS, 3RUG 0.006 to 0.009

(0.15 to 0.23)
RTV 0.000
TABLE B-6 Piston Ring Side Clearances, in. (mm)
Actual Groove Width PTFE PEEK
0.188 to 0.190 (4.78 to 4.83) 0.003 to 0.008 (0.09 to 0.21) 0.002 to 0.007 (0.05 to 0.17)
0.250 to 0.252 (6.35 to 6.40) 0.005 to 0.010 (0.11 to 0.24) 0.003 to 0.008 (0.06 to 0.19)
0.312 to 0.314 (7.92 to 7.98) 0.006 to 0.011 (0.14 to 0.27) 0.003 to 0.008 (0.08 to 0.21)
0.375 to 0.377 (9.53 to 9.58) 0.007 to 0.012 (0.17 to 0.30) 0.004 to 0.009 (0.10 to 0.22)
0.438 to 0.440 (11.13 to 11.18) 0.008 to 0.013 (0.20 to 0.33) 0.004 to 0.009 (0.11 to 0.24)
0.500 to 0.502 (12.70 to 12.75) 0.009 to 0.014 (0.23 to 0.36) 0.005 to 0.010 (0.13 to 0.25)
0.563 to 0.565 (14.30 to 14.35) 0.010 to 0.015 (0.26 to 0.38) 0.006 to 0.011 (0.14 to 0.27)
0.625 to 0.627 (15.88 to 15.93) 0.011 to 0.016 (0.29 to 0.41) 0.006 to 0.011 (0.16 to 0.29)
0.688 to 0.690 (17.48 to 17.53) 0.012 to 0.017 (0.31 to 0.44) 0.007 to 0.012 (0.17 to 0.30)
0.750 to 0.752 (19.05 to 19.10) 0.014 to 0.019 (0.34 to 0.47) 0.008 to 0.013 (0.19 to 0.32)
Page B-2 of 11 REV: 07/19

Appendix B - Clearances For models JGH:E:K:T
TABLE B-7 Wearband Side Clearances, in. (mm)
Actual Groove Width PTFE PEEK
0.500 to 0.502 (12.70 to 12.75) 0.006 to 0.011 (0.15 to 0.28) 0.004 to 0.009 (0.09 to 0.22)
0.750 to 0.752 (19.05 to 19.10) 0.009 to 0.014 (0.23 to 0.36) 0.005 to 0.010 (0.13 to 0.26)
0.875 to 0.877 (22.23 to 22.28) 0.011 to 0.016 (0.27 to 0.39) 0.006 to 0.011 (0.16 to 0.28)
1.000 to 1.002 (25.40 to 25.45) 0.012 to 0.017 (0.30 to 0.43) 0.007 to 0.012 (0.18 to 0.30)
1.250 to 1.252 (31.75 to 31.80) 0.015 to 0.020 (0.38 to 0.51) 0.009 to 0.014 (0.22 to 0.35)
1.375 to 1.377 (34.93 to 34.98) 0.017 to 0.022 (0.42 to 0.55) 0.010 to 0.015 (0.24 to 0.37)
1.500 to 1.502 (38.10 to 38.15) 0.018 to 0.023 (0.46 to 0.58) 0.011 to 0.016 (0.27 to 0.39)
1.625 to 1.627 (41.28 to 41.33) 0.020 to 0.025 (0.50 to 0.62) 0.011 to 0.016 (0.29 to 0.42)
1.750 to 1.752 (44.45 to 44.50) 0.021 to 0.026 (0.53 to 0.66) 0.012 to 0.017 (0.31 to 0.44)
1.875 to 1.877 (47.63 to 47.68) 0.023 to 0.028 (0.57 to 0.70) 0.013 to 0.018 (0.33 to 0.46)
2.000 to 2.002 (50.80 to 50.85) 0.024 to 0.029 (0.61 to 0.74) 0.014 to 0.019 (0.36 to 0.48)
2.125 to 2.127 (53.98 to 54.03) 0.026 to 0.031 (0.65 to 0.77) 0.015 to 0.020 (0.38 to 0.50)
2.250 to 2.252 (57.15 to 57.20) 0.027 to 0.032 (0.69 to 0.81) 0.016 to 0.021 (0.40 to 0.53)
2.500 to 2.502 (63.50 to 63.55) 0.030 to 0.035 (0.76 to 0.89) 0.018 to 0.023 (0.44 to 0.57)
2.750 to 2.752 (69.85 to 69.90) 0.033 to 0.038 (0.84 to 0.97) 0.019 to 0.024 (0.49 to 0.62)
2.875 to 2.877 (73.03 to 73.08) 0.035 to 0.040 (0.88 to 1.00) 0.020 to 0.025 (0.51 to 0.64)
3.000 to 3.003 (76.20 to 76.28) 0.036 to 0.041 (0.91 to 1.04) 0.021 to 0.026 (0.53 to 0.66)
3.250 to 3.253 (82.55 to 82.63) 0.039 to 0.044 (0.99 to 1.12) 0.023 to 0.028 (0.58 to 0.70)
3.500 to 3.503 (88.90 to 88.98) 0.042 to 0.047 (1.07 to 1.19) 0.025 to 0.030 (0.62 to 0.75)
3.750 to 3.753 (95.25 to 95.33) 0.045 to 0.050 (1.14 to 1.27) 0.026 to 0.031 (0.67 to 0.79)
4.000 to 4.004 (101.60 to 101.70) 0.048 to 0.053 (1.22 to 1.35) 0.028 to 0.033 (0.71 to 0.84)
REV: 07/19 Page B-3 of 11

TABLE B-8 Piston-Bore Clearances and H:E:ET Cylinder Piston/Rider Ring End Gaps, in. (mm)
Conventional Piston Ring New

Piston to Bore Diametral Clearance
Bore End Gap Piston/Rider
Diameter Conventional Piston/Rider Ring End
New Maximum Gapb
Piston Rings Ringsa
4.25 (108) 0.011 to 0.016 0.090 to 0.096 0.051 to 0.075 0.225 (5.72) 0.050 to 0.066
(.028 to 0.41) (2.29 to 2.44) (1.30 to 1.91) (1.27 to 1.68)
4.625 (117) 0.012 to 0.017 0.056 to 0.080 0.240 (6.10) 0.056 to 0.072
(0.30 to 0.43) (1.42 to 2.03) (1.42 to 1.83)
5.125 (130) 0.061 to 0.085 0.255 (6.48) 0.062 to 0.078

(1.55 to 2.16) (1.57 to 1.98)
5.5 (140) 0.013 to 0.018 0.066 to 0.090 0.270 (6.86) 0.068 to 0.084
(0.33 to 0.46) (1.68 to 2.29) (1.73 to 2.13)
6.0 (152) 0.072 to 0.112 0.336 (8.53) 0.074 to 0.090

(1.83 to 2.84) (1.88 to 2.29)
6.375 (162) 0.014 to 0.019 0.077 to 0.117 0.351 (8.92) 0.073 to 0.103
(0.36 to 0.48) (1.96 to 2.97) (1.85 to 2.62)
7.0 (178) 0.015 to 0.020 0.084 to 0.124 0.372 (9.45) 0.091 to 0.121
(0.38 to 0.51) (2.13 to 3.15) (2.31 to 3.07)
7.375 (187) 0.089 to 0.129 0.387 (9.83) 0.097 to 0.127

(2.26 to 3.28) (2.46 to 3.23)
8.0 (203) 0.016 to 0.022 0.096 to 0.136 0.408 (10.36) 0.095 to 0.125
(0.41 to 0.56) (2.44 to 3.45) (2.41 to 3.18)
8.375 (213) 0.017 to 0.023 0.101 to 0.141 0.423 (10.74) 0.100 to 0.130
(0.43 to 0.58) (2.57 to 3.58) (2.54 to 3.30)
9.25 (235) 0.019 to 0.025 0.111 to 0.151 0.453 (11.51) 0.112 to 0.142
(0.48 to 0.64) (2.82 to 3.84) (2.84 to 3.61)
9.75 (248) 0.020 to 0.026 0.117 to 0.157 0.471 (11.96) 0.119 to 0.149
(0.51 to 0.66) (2.97 to 3.99) (3.02 to 3.78)
11 (279) 0.022 to 0.028 0.131 to 0.179 0.537 (13.64) 0.136 to 0.166

(0.56 to 0.71) (3.33 to 4.55) (3.45 to 4.22)
11.5 (292) 0.023 to 0.029 0.138 to 0.186 0.558 (14.17) 0.143 to 0.173
(0.58 to 0.74) (3.51 to 4.72) (3.63 to 4.39)
13 (330) 0.026 to 0.032 0.156 to 0.204 0.612 (15.54) 0.182 to 0.212

(0.66 to 0.81) (3.96 to 5.18) (4.62 to 5.38)
13.5 (343) 0.027 to 0.033 0.162 to 0.210 0.630 (16.00) 0.190 to 0.220
(0.69 to 0.84) (4.11 to 5.33) (4.83 to 5.59)

Conventional Piston Ring New

Piston to Bore Diametral Clearance
Bore End Gap Piston/Rider
Diameter Conventional Piston/Rider Ring End
New Maximum Gapb
Piston Rings Ringsa
15.250 (387) 0.030 to 0.037 0.090 to 0.097 0.183 to 0.231 0.693 (17.60) 0.216 to 0.246
(0.76 to 0.94) (2.29 to 2.46) (4.65 to 5.87) (5.49 to 6.25)
15.75 (400) 0.031 to 0.038 0.189 to 0.237 0.711 (18.06) 0.224 to 0.254
(0.79 to 0.97) (4.80 to 6.02) (5.69 to 6.45)
16.75 (425) 0.033 to 0.040 0.201 to 0.251 0.753 (19.13) 0.239 to 0.269
(0.84 to 1.02) (5.11 to 6.38) (6.07 to 6.83)
17.25 (438) 0.034 to 0.041 0.207 to 0.259 0.777 (19.74) 0.247 to 0.277
(0.86 to 1.04) (5.26 to 6.58) (6.27 to 7.04)
19 (483) 0.038 to 0.046 0.090 to 0.098 0.228 to 0.292 0.876 (22.25) 0.273 to 0.303
(0.97 to 1.17) (2.29 to 2.49) (5.79 to 7.42) (6.93 to 7.70)
19.5 (495) 0.039 to 0.047 0.234 to 0.298 0.894 (22.71) 0.281 to 0.311
(0.99 to 1.19) (5.94 to 7.57) (7.14 to 7.90)
22.5 (572) Uses wearbands - See TABLE B-9.
a. Piston/rider rings are standard on all ET & all E Class cylinders except 22.5 (572). Conventional piston rings are standard on H class
cylinders and piston/rider rings are optional on bore diameters of 4.25 to 11.5 (108 to 292) with the exception of bore diameters 4.625
(117), 5.5 (140), 6.375 (162). Piston/rider rings are standard on H class cylinders with bore diameters of 4.625 (117), 5.5 (140), 6.375
(162), and 13 to 19.5 (330 to 495). H & E class cylinders are out-of-production; use them only if they meet application requirements.
Consult your packager and/or Ariel when re-applying cylinders.
b. Piston/rider ring radial projection is 0.026 to 0.033 (0.66 to 0.84) and side clearance is 0.008 to 0.013 (0.20 to 0.33).
TABLE B-9 Clearance Specifications for K, T, and 22-1/2 E:ET:Ha Cylinders, in. (mm)
PISTON RING END GAP

PISTON TO CYLINDER WEAR BAND - NEW
(PTFE) b
Diametral Minimum
Bore New Maximum Radial Projection
Clearance End Gap
2.5 (63.5) 0.055 to 0.063 0.015 to 0.075 (1.91) 0.080 (2.03) 0.018 to 0.025
(1.40 to 1.60) 0.025 (0.46 to 0.64)
(0.38 to 0.64)
2.625 (66.7) 0.015 to 0.075 (1.91) 0.084 (2.13)

0.025
(0.38 to 0.64)
3 (76.2) 0.017 to 0.081 (2.06) 0.096 (2.44)

0.027
(0.43 to 0.69)

PISTON RING END GAP

(PTFE) b
Diametral Minimum
Clearance End Gap
3.5 (88.9) 0.060 to 0.068 0.011 to 0.054 (1.37) 0.112 (2.84) 0.018 to 0.026
(1.52 to 1.73) 0.018 (0.46 to 0.66)
(0.28 to 0.46)
3.875 (98.4) 0.012 to 0.057 (1.45) 0.124 (3.15)

0.019
(0.30 to 0.48)
4.25 (108) 0.071 to 0.079 0.051 to 0.183 (4.65) 0.136 (3.45) 0.023 to 0.031
(1.80 to 2.01) 0.061 (0.58 to 0.79)
(1.30 to 1.55)
4.375 (111) 0.053 to 0.189 (4.80) 0.140 (3.56) 0.026 to 0.033

0.063 (0.66 to 0.84)
(1.35 to 1.60)
4.625 (117) 0.056 to 0.198 (5.03) 0.148 (3.76) 0.023 to 0.031

0.066 (0.58 to 0.79)
(1.42 to 1.68)
5 (127) 0.081 to 0.089 0.050 to 0.180 (4.57) 0.160 (4.06) 0.027 to 0.035
(2.06 to 2.26) 0.060 (0.69 to 0.89)
(1.27 to 1.52)
5.375 (137) 0.065 to 0.231 (4.88) 0.172 (4.37)

0.077
(1.65 to 1.96)
5.875 (149) 0.059 to 0.213 (5.41) 0.188 (4.78)

0.071
(1.50 to 1.80)
6.25 (159) 0.063 to 0.414 (10.52) 0.200 (5.08)

0.138
(1.60 to 3.50)
6.75 (171) 0.087 to 0.096 0.068 to 0.243 (6.17) 0.216 (5.49) 0.029 to 0.037
(2.21 to 2.44) 0.081 (0.74 to 0.94)
(1.73 to 2.06)
7.00 (178) 0.070 to 0.252 (6.40) 0.224 (5.69)

0.084
(1.78 to 2.13)
7.25 (184) 0.072 to 0.261 (6.63) 0.232 (5.89)

0.087
(1.83 to 2.21)

PISTON RING END GAP

(PTFE) b
Diametral Minimum
Clearance End Gap
7.875 (200) 0.092 to 0.101 0.079 to 0.285 (7.24) 0.252 (6.40) 0.031 to 0.040
(2.34 to 2.57) 0.095 (0.79 to 1.02)
(2.00 to 2.41)
8.375 (213) 0.084 to 0.300 (7.62) 0.268 (6.81)

0.100
(2.13 to 2.54)
8.75 (222) 0.090 to 0.098 0.105 to 0.375 (9.53) 0.280 (7.11) 0.030 to 0.039
(2.29 to 2.51) 0.125 (0.76 to 0.99)
(2.67 to 3.18)
9.125 (232) 0.096 to 0.105 0.091 to 0.330 (8.38) 0.291 (7.39) 0.033 to 0.042
(2.44 to 2.67) 0.110 (0.84 to 1.07)
(2.31 to 2.79)
9.25 (235) 0.090 to 0.098 0.111 to 0.393 (9.98) 0.296 (7.52) 0.030 to 0.039
(2.29 to 2.51) 0.131 (0.76 to 0.99)
(2.82 to 3.33)
9.625 (244) 0.096 to 0.105 0.096 to 0.346 (8.79) 0.307 (7.80) 0.033 to 0.042
(2.44 to 2.67) 0.116 (0.84 to 1.07)
(2.44 to 2.95)
9.75 (248) 0.090 to 0.098 0.117 to 0.411 (10.44) 0.312 (7.92) 0.030 to 0.039
(2.29 to 2.51) 0.137 (0.76 to 0.99)
(2.97 to 3.49)
9.875 (251) 0.109 to 0.118 0.099 to 0.357 (9.07) 0.316 (8.03) 0.037 to 0.047
(2.77 to 3.00) 0.119 (0.94 to 1.19)
(2.51 to 3.02)
10.25 (260) 0.090 to 0.098 0.110 to 0.396 (10.06) 0.327 (8.31) 0.033 to 0.040
(2.29 to 2.51) 0.132 (0.84 to 1.02)
(2.79 to 3.35)
10.375 (264) 0.109 to 0.118 0.104 to 0.375 (9.53) 0.332 (8.43) 0.037 to 0.047
(2.77 to 3.00) 0.125 (0.94 to 1.19)
(2.64 to 3.18)
10.5 (267) 0.114 to 0.123 0.105 to 0.378 (9.60) 0.336 (8.53) 0.039 to 0.049
(2.90 to 3.12) 0.126 (0.99 to 1.24)
(2.67 to 3.20)
10.75 (273) 0.090 to 0.098 0.110 to 0.396 (10.06) 0.344 (8.74) 0.033 to 0.040
(2.29 to 2.51) 0.132 (0.84 to 1.02)
(2.79 to 3.35)

PISTON RING END GAP

(PTFE) b
Diametral Minimum
Clearance End Gap
10.875 (276) 0.114 to 0.123 0.108 to 0.393 (9.98) 0.348 (8.84) 0.039 to 0.049
(2.90 to 3.12) 0.130 (0.99 to 1.24)
(2.74 to 3.30)
11 (279) 0.114 to 0.123 0.110 to 0.396 (10.06) 0.352 (8.94)

(2.90 to 3.12) 0.132
(2.79 to 3.35)
11 (L&M) 0.090 to 0.098 0.110 to 0.396 (10.06) 0.352 (8.94) 0.033 to 0.040
(279) (2.29 to 2.51) 0.132 (0.84 to 1.02)
(2.79 to 3.35)
11.25 (286) 0.100 to 0.108 0.135 to 0.477 (12.12) 0.360 (9.14) 0.036 to 0.042
(2.54 to 2.74) 0.159 (0.91 to 1.07)
(3.42 to 4.04)
11.375 (289) 0.114 to 0.123 0.114 to 0.411 (10.44) 0.364 (9.25) 0.039 to 0.049
(2.90 to 3.12) 0.137 (0.99 to 1.24)
(2.90 to 3.48)
11.75 (298) 0.100 to 0.108 0.141 to 0.495 (12.57) 0.376 (9.55) 0.036 to 0.044
(2.54 to 2.74) 0.165 (0.91 to 1.07)
(3.58 to 4.19)
12 (305) 0.117 to 0.128 0.120 to 0.432 (10.97) 0.384 (9.75) 0.039 to 0.050
(2.97 to 3.24) 0.144 (0.99 to 1.27)
(3.05 to 3.66)
12.25 (311) 0.117 to 0.128 0.123 to 0.441 (11.20) 0.392 (9.96)

(2.97 to 3.23) 0.147
(3.12 to 3.73)
12.375 (314) 0.100 to 0.108 0.148 to 0.516 (12.95) 0.396 (10.06) 0.036 to 0.042
(2.54 to 2.74) 0.172 (0.91 to 1.07)
(3.76 to 4.37)
12.5 (318) 0.117 to 0.128 0.125 to 0.450 (11.43) 0.400 (10.16) 0.039 to 0.050
(2.97 to 3.24) 0.150 (0.99 to 1.27)
(3.18 to 3.81)

PISTON RING END GAP

(PTFE) b
Diametral Minimum
Clearance End Gap
13.125 (333) 0.126 to 0.137 0.131 to 0.474 (12.04) 0.419 (10.64) 0.043 to 0.053
(3.20 to 3.48) 0.158 (1.09 to 1.35)
(3.33 to 4.01)
13.625 (346) 0.136 to 0.490 (12.45) 0.435 (11.05)

0.164
(3.45 to 4.17)
14.125 (359) 0.141 to 0.508 (12.90) 0.451 (11.46)

0.170
(3.58 to 4.32)
14.25 (362) 0.171 to 0.585 (14.86) 0.456 (11.58) 0.042 to 0.052

0.195 (1.07 to 1.32)
(4.34 to 4.95)
14.75 (375) 0.177 to 0.603 (15.32) 0.472 (11.99)

0.201
(4.50 to 5.11)
15.375 (391) 0.127 to 0.138 0.154 to 0.555 (14.10) 0.492 (12.50) 0.038 to 0.050
(3.23 to 3.50) 0.185 (0.97 to 1.27)
(3.91 to 4.70)
15.875 (403) 0.127 to 0.138 0.159 to 0.573 (14.55) 0.508 (12.90) 0.038 to 0.050
(3.23 to 3.50) 0.191 (0.97 to 1.27)
(4.04 to 4.85)
17.375 (441) 0.179 to 0.191 0.174 to 0.627 (15.93) 0.556 (14.12) 0.044 to 0.057
(4.55 to 4.85) 0.209 (1.12 to 1.45)
(4.42 to 5.31)
17.875 (454) 0.181 to 0.193 0.179 to 0.645 (16.38) 0.572 (14.53)

(4.60 to 4.90) 0.215
(4.55 to 5.46)
19.625 (498) 0.187 to 0.199 0.236 to 0.804 (20.42) 0.627 (15.93) 0.050 to 0.063
(4.75 to 5.05) 0.268 (1.27 to 1.60)
(5.99 to 6.81)
20.125 (511) 0.185 to 0.197 0.242 to 0.822 (20.88) 0.643 (16.33)

(4.70 to 5.00) 0.274
(6.15 to 6.96)
22 (559) 0.213 to 0.225 0.264 to 0.912 (23.16) 0.703 (17.86) 0.059 to 0.072
(5.41 to 5.72) 0.304 (1.50 to 1.83)
(6.71 to 7.72)
22.5 (572) 0.152 to 0.164 0.270 to 0.930 (23.62) 0.734 (18.64)

(3.86 to 4.17) 0.310
(6.86 to 7.87)

PISTON RING END GAP

(PTFE) b
Diametral Minimum
Clearance End Gap
24.125 (613) 0.214 to 0.226 0.290 to 0.990 (25.15) 0.771 (19.58) 0.056 to 0.069
(5.44 to 5.74) 0.330 (1.42 to 1.75)
(7.36 to 8.38)
26.5 (673) 0.226 to 0.238 0.320 to 1.080 (27.43) 0.847 (21.51) 0.058 to 0.071
(5.74 to 6.05) 0.360 (1.47 to 1.80)
(8.13 to 9.14)
a. E & H Class Cylinders are out-of-production; use existing E & H cylinders only if they meet application requirements. Consult your
packager and/or Ariel when re-applying cylinders.
b. For PEEK piston ring end gap values, multiply table values by 0.3.
Measuring Head End Clearance for Forged Steel

Tandem Cylinders with Concentric Valves
CAUTION: Completely vent compressor to relieve ALL gas pressure and remove
coupling spacer prior to removing access covers for compressor internal maintenance.
For electric drive motors, lock out the breaker. Failure to follow these steps can result in
serious personal injury or death.
1. Set crank end piston clearance to the proper feeler

gauge specification stamped on the cylinder data plate or
printed in the Ariel Technical manual.
2. With head end components removed, position the piston
for the desired cylinder at outer dead center. Position a
dial indicator to index off of the crosshead or crosshead
nut outer face, with the cylinder near to outer dead
center. Manually turn crankshaft to find the 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm) position, before and after outer dead center.
Then turn crankshaft to position piston at outer dead
center (see picture to the right).
3. Dimension A: Measure from cylinder head end to
piston head end to the nearest thousandth inch and
record. See illustration on the following page.
4. Dimension B: With gasket removed, measure from
head end cylinder face to the gasket seat and record.
Page B-10 of 11 REV: 07/19

5. Dimension C:
Nom. Thickness Use

.030 .028
.060 .055
.060 .070*
*Use when the cylinder has a removable liner with a

metallic tapered seat gasket between it and the
cylinder body (see ER-118).
6. Calculate Head End Clearance:
A - B + C = Head End Clearance
A _______________
- B _______________
+ C _______________
= _______________
7. Compare calculated head end piston clearance to clearance tolerances stamped on the cylinder
data plate or printed in the Ariel Technical manual. If tolerances are unavailable or if calculated
clearance is outside tolerance, contact your packager or Ariel before proceeding.
8. Measure head end piston clearance prior to new start up, as required by recommended
maintenance intervals in Section 3 , or after installation, removal, or replacement of any one of the
following:
l Crankshaft
l Connecting Rod
l Crosshead Guide
l Piston and/or Piston Rod
l Either Tandem Cylinder Body
l Crosshead and/or Crosshead Nut
9. Re-assemble all components according to the Ariel Maintenance and Repair Manual supplied with
your compressor. Verify installation of all gaskets and manually bar over the compressor to confirm
the crankshaft rotates freely.
REV: 07/19 Page B-11 of 11

Appendix C - Frame Specifications
For more information, see the Ariel Performance Program. Rated speeds for non-lube and lubricated
process applications may vary.
TABLE C-1 JGH Frame Specifications
Specification JGH/2 JGH/4
Stroke, in. (mm) 4.50 (114)
Maximum Allowable Speed,a RPM 1200
Minimum Speed,b RPM 600
Piston Speed,c FPM (m/s) To 900 (4.57)
Horsepower, hp (kW) 680 (507) 1360 (1014)
Maximum Length, in. (m) 53 (1.35) 98 (2.49)
Maximum Overall Height, in. (m) 29 (0.74) to top of aluminum cover
Maximum Width with Cylinders See appropriate frame, guide, and cylinder outline
drawings.
Height - Bottom to Crankshaft Centerline, in. (mm) 17 (432)
Approximate Weight with Cylinders See Ariel Performance Program.
Connecting Rod Centerline to Centerline, in. (mm) 13.75 (349)
Sump Capacity, US gallons (L) 15 (57) 37 (140)
Oil Pump Flow Rate,d GPM (L/s) 13 (0.82) 26 (1.64)
Oil Heat Rejection, BTU/hr. (kW) 25,000 (7.3) 50,000 (14.7)
Piston Rod Diameter, in. (mm) 2.00 (51)
Internal Rod Load - Double Acting
Compression + Tension, lbf. (kN) 48,000 (214)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 24,000 (107)
Compression, lbf. (kN) 30,000 (133)
Internal Rod Load - Single Acting
Tension, lbf. (kN) 24,000 (107)
a. Maximum Allowable Speed is the highest (potential) speed at which the frame design permits continuous operation. Compressor frame
data plate "Frame Rated Speed (RPM)" is application specific, and may be lower than Maximum Allowable Speed. Do not exceed the
lower of frame rated speed, lowest cylinder rated (RPM), or driver rated speed.
b. Minimum Speed is the lowest frame speed needed to provide adequate oil flow to the compressor bearings.
c. Average Piston Speed is based on Maximum Allowable Speed (RPM). The cylinder data-plate rated speed (RPM) or frame rated
speed may be less, resulting in a lower piston speed rating.
d. Flow rate at maximum rated speed and 180°F (82°C) oil.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix C - Frame Specifications
TABLE C-2 JGE Frame Specifications
Specification JGE/2 JGE/4 JGE/6
Stroke, in. (mm) 4.50 (114)
Horsepower, hp (kW) 1070 (798) 2140 (1596) 3210 (2394)
Maximum Length, in. (m) 53 (1.35) 98 (2.49) 140 (3.56)
drawings.
Sump Capacity, US gal. (L) 15 (57) 37 (140) 56 (212)
Oil Pump Flow Rate,d GPM (L/s) 17 (1.07) 32 (2.02) 85 (5.36)
Oil Heat Rejection BTU/hr (kW) 34,000 (10.0) 68,000 (19.9) 102,000 (29.9)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 30,000 (133)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 30,000 (133)
c. Average Piston Speed is based on Maximum Allowable Speed (RPM). The cylinder data-plate rated speed (RPM) or frame rated speed
may be less, resulting in a lower piston speed rating.
Page C-2 of 5 REV: 07/19

Appendix C - Frame Specifications For models JGH:E:K:T
TABLE C-3 JGK Frame Specifications
Specification JGK/2 JGK/4 JGK/6
Stroke, in. (mm) 5.50 (140)
Horsepower, hp (kW) 1270 (947) 2540 (1894) 3810 (2841)
drawings.
Oil Pump Flow Rate,d GPM (L/s) 13 (0.82) 26 (1.64) 68 (4.29)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 37,000 (165)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 37,000 (165)
c. Average Piston Speed is based on Maximum Allowable Speed (RPM). The cylinder data-plate rated speed (RPM) or frame rated
speed may be less, resulting in a lower piston speed rating.
REV: 07/19 Page C-3 of 5

For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix C - Frame Specifications
TABLE C-4 JGT Frame Specifications
Specification JGT/2 JGT/4 JGT/6
Stroke, in. (mm) 4.50 (114)
Horsepower, hp (kW) 1300 (969) 2600 (1939) 3900 (2908)
drawings.
Oil Pump Flow Rate,d GPM (L/s) 17 (1.1) 32 (2.0) 84.9 (5.4)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 37,000 (165)
Tension, lbf. (kN) 37,000 (165)
c. Average Piston Speed is based on Maximum Allowable Speed (RPM). The cylinder data-plate rated speed (RPM) or frame rated speed
may be less, resulting in a lower piston speed rating.
Page C-4 of 5 REV: 07/19

Appendix C - Frame Specifications For models JGH:E:K:T
Opposed Throw - Reciprocating Weight Balancing

Ariel recommends a reciprocating weight differential between opposing throws of 2.5 pounds (1.1kg) or
less for JGH:E:K:T compressors.
To replace a connecting rod assembly, piston, piston and rod assembly, balance nuts, or crosshead,
weigh component parts on a scale calibrated to 0.1 pound (0.05 kg) and compare to the Balancing
Record in the compressor Parts Book. If the weight changes, recalculate opposing throw reciprocating
weight differential. If not within recommended limits, the compressor may require new balance nuts
and/or crossheads.
To exchange opposing throw cylinder locations, exchange all reciprocating components to the opposite
throw, except the connecting rod assemblies. Check the Balancing Record and recalculate
reciprocating weight differential, including the weight of the connecting rods. If not within recommended
limits, the compressor may require new crosshead balance nuts to reduce differential.
If unable to balance opposing throws within recommended limits, contact the packager or Ariel. When
applying or re-applying a different cylinder to a throw, recalculate opposing throw reciprocating weight
differential; new balance nuts and/or crossheads may be required. The force feed oil distribution system
may also need resized. Contact the packager or the Ariel Response Center for detailed information
about recommended reciprocating weight differential between opposing throws.
TABLE C-5 JGH:E:K:T Approximate Component Weights, Lbs (Kg)
Component Weight Component Weight
Main/Connecting Rod Bearing 2 (1) Crosshead Guide (K:T long single) 659 (299)
Top Cover 2-Throw 55 (25) Crosshead Guide (H:E short two) 619 (281)
Top Cover 4-Throw 115 (52) Crosshead Guide (K:T short two) 688 (312)
Top Cover 6-Throw 172 (78) Crosshead Guide (H:E long two) 756 (343)
Spacer Bar 16 (7) Crosshead Guide (K:T long two) 947 (430)
End Cover Drive End 85 (40) Crosshead See Notea
End Cover Auxiliary End 130 (60) Crosshead Pin 25 (12)
Crankshaft 2-Throwb 580 (263) Lube Oil Pump 2-Throw 36 (16)
Main Journal Caps 20 (9) Frame Assembly w/o Cylinders See Ariel
VVCP Performance
Connecting Rod 91 (41) Cylinder Assembly Program.
Crosshead Guide (H:E long single) 598 (271) Piston & Rod Assemblya
a. For exact weights, see Balancing Record sheet provided by Ariel in the Parts Book for each compressor.
b. Crankshaft weight is without flywheel or vibration detuners.
REV: 07/19 Page C-5 of 5

Appendix D - Compressor Clearance, Oil,
& Temperature Record
SERIAL NO. F-_______________________MODEL _____________Date __________________
CRANKSHAFT THRUST (END) CLEARANCE, In. (mm)
Crankshaft Serial Number Thrust Clearance, In. (mm)
CONNECTING ROD THRUST (SIDE) CLEARANCE, In. (mm)
Throw 1 Throw 2 Throw 3 Throw 4 Throw 5 Throw 6
JACK CLEARANCES, In. (mm)
Throw # 1 2 3 4 5 6
Main Bearing
Conn. Rod Bearing
After new bearing installation, if measured clearances exceed tolerances in Appendix B, contact your packager or Ariel
before proceeding.
OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
Date Time RPM Filter Inlet Filter Outlet Oil Temp. Remarks
Oil Pressure Oil Pressure into Frame
psig (barg) psig (barg) °F (°C)
Throw BEARING CAP TEMPERATURE, °F (°C), AFTER RUN TIME OF:
3 Minutes Idle Speed Additional 3-5 Minutes Additional 10-15 Minutes

(engine, VFD)
Full Speed Full Speed
1 Minute (single speed motor)
No Gas Load Gas Load
No Gas Load
Main Rod Main Rod Main Rod
REV: 07/19
Appendix E - Balance Valve Log
TABLE E-1 Balance Valve Maintenance Log
Pressure Div. Block Balance Div. Block

Date Time Gauge Pressure Valve Set Cycle Time Notes
Description Min. Max. Pressure (Seconds)
REV: 07/19
Appendix F - ER-34.1
Cleaning, Handling, and Assembly Lubricants for
Non-Lubricated Compressor Cylinders
Cleaning and handling are critical to prevent premature wear and failure of non-metallic rings and
packings in non-lube compressor cylinders. Proper cleaning and handling will virtually eliminate oil and
anti-seize compounds from the cylinder interior, piston rod assembly, valve and packing case areas. In
non-lubricated applications, the non-metallic rings and packings transfer some material to the metallic
running surfaces. This transferred film provides a “lubricated” surface that enables the compressor to
function properly. The presence of oil degrades the transferred film, forming an abrasive paste that
quickly wears non-metallic elements during operation. Anti-seize compounds are oil based and also
contain abrasive metallic components that cause premature component wear.
This procedure applies to all non-lube compressor cylinders. Ariel cleans and protects complete non-
lube cylinders to non-lube service requirements before shipping. Follow the procedure below to clean
internal parts shipped loose, spare parts before installation, and contaminated surfaces during
maintenance. This extends non-lube compressor component life, and ultimately, cylinder life.
CAUTION: Denatured alcohol presents health and safety hazards. Keep away from heat,
sparks, flame and all other ignition sources. Use adequate ventilation, neoprene or
butyl gloves, mono-goggles or face-mask, and impermeable apron. Contains methyl
alcohol; poisonous if ingested. Avoid eye and skin contact. Properly handle and
dispose of materials resulting from clean-up. See manufacturer Material Safety Data
Sheets for details.
NOTE: Clean all table surfaces and tools that will come in contact with the cylinder, cylinder
components, or piston components
1. Handle all cleaned parts with new or clean “rubber” gloves or new white cotton gloves. If gloves
become contaminated or dirty, dispose of them and use a new pair.
2. Clean cylinder interior surfaces thoroughly with denatured alcohol until a clean, alcohol soaked,
white paper towel or lint-free rag removes no more debris. This includes all surfaces of the bore,
counter bore, valve pockets, suction and discharge gas passages, nozzles, etc.
3. Lubricate the threads, bolt head, and stat-o-seal of the cylinder nozzle lube bolt with very small
amounts of Never-Seez, regular grade, and ensure all mating surfaces are coated.
4. Use a small amount of Loctite 567 Pipe Sealant on male threads when installing pipe plugs.
5. Very lightly oil bolt threads and head seating surfaces for valve cap, head, and packing case
mounting bolts, but prevent oil penetration into the cylinder interior.
6. Thoroughly clean piston, collar, rod, and nut with denatured alcohol until a clean, alcohol soaked
paper towel or lint-free rag removes no more debris. Clean piston ring grooves and wear band
grooves especially well. Clean piston rings and wear bands with denatured alcohol before
assembling.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix F - ER-34.1
7. When assembling piston to rod, use very small amounts of Never-Seez, Regular Grade on the nut
and collar, and ensure all mating surfaces are covered. Do not lube threads for the piston rod
tensioner. Clean threads of hydraulic tensioner and all other tensioner surfaces that will contact the
piston. Use very small amounts of Never-Seez, Regular Grade on piston nut set screws. After
assembly, thoroughly wipe off all Never-Seez from the piston rod assembly exterior in the collar and
nut areas with denatured alcohol until a clean, alcohol soaked, white paper towel or lint-free rag
removes no more debris.
8. The manufacturer should provide packing cases cleaned, preserved, and suitable for non-lube
service. Inspect packing cases for cleanliness. If they appear coated with an oil-based preservative,
disassemble and clean them with denatured alcohol, then reassemble. If disassembly is required for
water-cooled packing cases, re-assemble and test to Ariel Engineering Reference ER-51. Contact
Ariel for latest version of ER-51.
9. Wipe down piston rod with denatured alcohol after rod installation.
10. Clean VVCP or FVCP components with denatured alcohol. Separate the unloader head from the
adapter/actuator. Clean all internal surfaces with denatured alcohol including behind the unloader
piston. Do not remove VVCP unloader stem seal. Clean piston ring with denatured alcohol. Do not
use anti-seize compounds or oil on the steel head gaskets. Use a very thin film of oil when installing
O-rings.
11. Clean crank-end head, head-end head, and steel head gaskets with denatured alcohol. Do not use
anti-seize compounds or oil on the steel head gaskets. If the crank-end head uses an O-ring seal,
apply a very thin film of oil to the lead-in chamfer of the cylinder seating surface to help prevent
shearing of the O-ring.
12. The manufacturer should provide compressor valves cleaned, preserved, and suitable for non-lube
service. Inspect valves for cleanliness. If they appear coated with an oil-based preservative,
disassemble and clean them with denatured alcohol, then reassemble. If they appear clean, they
require no additional cleaning provided they are sealed in their original packaging and have not been
contaminated.
13. Clean valve caps, retainers, high clearance assemblies, and steel valve gaskets with denatured
alcohol. Use only a very thin film of oil for valve cap O-rings. Do not use anti-seize compounds or oil
on steel valve gaskets.
14. Assemble cleaned parts immediately. If cylinder will not see immediate service, see Ariel
Engineering Reference ER-34 for preservation instructions. Contact Ariel for latest version of ER-
34.
CAUTION: Do not use Ariel non-lube compressor cylinders for oxygen service.
Page F-2 of 2 REV: 07/19

Appendix G - ER-26
Hold-down Bolting to Resist Shaking Forces and
Couples in Reciprocating Compressors
Requirements
1. To use the torques in the tables, the ultimate strength (Su) of the stud material must equal or exceed
100,000 psi (690 MPa); higher strength stud material is preferred. In all cases, torque the nuts to
stress the stud to about 55% of the ultimate strength of the stud material. Torques shown in tables
are based on 100,000 psi ultimate strength material for imperial sizes and 830 MPa ultimate
strength material for metric sizes. Higher strength materials require higher torques than shown in
the tables. Material strength and torque are directly proportional. Example: for 120,000 psi (830
MPa) ultimate strength Imperial bolting: 120,000 ÷ 100,000 = 1.2 x min. torque for Imperial size from
table = required torque for given nut size. To use a different stud diameter, consult Ariel for feasibility
and torque.
2. Compressor frame foot hold-down studs and crosshead guide support foot hold-down studs should
be as long as possible. Ariel recommends a minimum 12 to 1 length to diameter ratio. NOTE:
Bolting long enough to reach only through the compressor foot and a deck plate or flange of an I-
beam can loosen if not provided with engineered devices to maintain bolt pre-load.
3. Tighten nuts as recommended TABLE G-1 Crosshead Guide to Support Bolt Torques
above to maintain fastener pre-load
during operation. Ariel also Bolting Size Bolting Torque
Compressor Model
recommends rolled threads and inch--TPI lb-ft (N•m)
hardened spherical washers for JGH:E 7/8 - 9 255 (345)
hold down bolting to help
compensate for fastener to frame JGK:T a 1" - 8 380 (515)
bolt surface angular misalignment.
a. For JGT compressors with ET crosshead guides, use 7/8”–9 TPI size in TABLE
4. Use grade 8 or 9 bolting to hold G-1 as the minimum torque.
crosshead guides to supports.
5. Re-preserve any fasteners subject to corrosion after installation.
6. Follow lubrication guidelines and recommended procedures for torque accuracy in Appendix A.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix G - ER-26
TABLE G-2 Crosshead Guide Support Foot and Frame Foot Hold-down Bolting - Minimum Torques a
Imperial Size
Metric Size (Class 8.8) c
Foot Hold- Hole (basis 100,000 psi)
Compressor
down Bolt Diameter Recom. Min. Nut Recom. Min. Nut
Model
Application b inch (mm) Stud Size Torque e Stud Size d Torqued
inch--TPI lb-ft (N•m) mm x pitch lb-ft (N•m)
JGH:E:K:T Guide 1-1/4 (32) 1-1/8 - 7 600 (810) M27x3 630 (850)
Support and
Frame M30x3.5 850 (1150)
a. See #1, "Requirements".

b. Crosshead guide support feet and frame feet with counterbored holes are designed to accept 12-point fasteners. To use hex head
fasteners or studs and nuts instead, a washer thick enough to clear the counterbore is required to provide adequate clearance for the
fastener and any tooling used for installation. A washer is also recommended for feet with holes that are milled flat.
c. Ultimate Strength: 830 MPa (120,000 psi); Yield Strength: 660 MPa (95,700 psi).
d. Where two sizes appear, the first is the preferred size, and the second is an alternate size.
e. For a stud pitch other than those listed above in the same nominal diameter size, use this formula to determine required torque: Torque
= (TABLE G-2 fastener torque) x (target fastener root area ÷ TABLE G-2 fastener root area).
Page G-2 of 2 REV: 07/19

Appendix H - ER-82
Soft Foot and Top Plane Flatness Checks for
Proper Main Bearing Bore Alignment in
Reciprocating Compressors
Main bearing bore alignment is critical to main bearing and crankshaft life. Ariel manufactures the top
cover mounting surface of a compressor frame in close tolerance to a flat plane, to the main bearing
bores, and to the bottom of the compressor feet. The main bearing bores align when frame feet are
supported so the top cover mounting surface is flat and "in plane". Perform a soft foot check and top
plane flatness measurement at these times:
l Setting of a new compressor (pre l Relocation of a package

and post grouting)
l Discovery of loose hold down fasteners
l Field commission of a compressor
l Performance of recommended scheduled maintenance
l Reinstallation of a compressor inspection every 6 months or 4000 hours
With new unit installations, Ariel recommends checking and recording initial top plane flatness before
shimming the guide feet and after initial rough coupling alignment. On compressors shipped
disassembled, perform the initial check before guide and cylinder assembly installation. Shim or
otherwise adjust the height to bring the top cover mounting surface within the specified plane tolerance.
Record subsequent readings after complete guide and cylinder installation, and again after any vessel
installation and shimming. Re-adjust height if guide, cylinder, and/or vessel installation results in frame
top rail measurements out of Appendix H tolerances.
For JGH:E:K:T frames, the soft foot check is required; the top plane flatness measurement is optional.
Soft Foot Check

1. Properly install and torque compressor frame hold down bolting.
2. Loosen each hold down bolt individually while checking the frame foot to skid deflection with a
calibrated dial indicator. If there are two bolts on a foot, loosen both for this check.
3. Correct any hold down position that deflects more than 0.002 inches (0.05 mm) when released. Re-
torque the hold down bolt or bolts and repeat on each frame foot. See Appendix G for proper frame
foot and crosshead guide bolt size and torques.
REV: 07/19
For models JGH:E:K:T Appendix H - ER-82
Top Plane Flatness Check

1. Remove or reposition the top cover(s) and gasket(s) to expose the frame top cover mounting
surface. Verify it is clean.
2. Use measurement equipment with a published accuracy of ±0.001 inches (0.025 mm) over the
distance required to measure the entire length of both frame rails. Measure the top surface of both
sides of the frame rails at each anchor bolt (see FIGURE H-1), or between each pair of anchor bolts
for frames with pairs of anchor bolts (see FIGURE H-2). For proper alignment, readings between
any two adjacent points must be within 0.002 in. (0.05 mm).
3. The ER-82 software tool determines if readings meet ER-82 specifications, and if not, provides
recommendations for shim corrections as well. Contact Ariel Technical Service for the latest version
of this tool.
4. Frame temperature can greatly affect flatness readings. Factors such as direct sunlight on a portion
of the frame or cooling after unit shut down can cause measurement inaccuracy. Ensure frame
temperature is consistent throughout the measurement process. Ariel recommends flatness
measurement while the frame is at ambient temperatures to minimize the effects of thermal
expansion.
NOTE: If the unit will not be restarted immediately, re-preserve the unit in a manner
appropriate to the time duration until restart.
FIGURE H-1 Flatness Check Locations for Frames with Single Anchor Bolts
FIGURE H-2 Flatness Check Locations for Frames with Pairs of Anchor Bolts
Page H-2 of 2 REV: 07/19

Appendix I - ER-89.10 For models JGH:E:K:T
Appendix I - ER-89.10
Attachment of Wiring, Tubing, or Pipe Clamps to
Ariel Compressor Cylinders
Ariel does not condone the practice of drilling and tapping holes to mount pipe, tubing, or instrument
clamps to any pressure containing component. Use of gas containment bolting to mount brackets or
other structural attachments is not allowed. These practices can compromise the integrity of pressure
containing components.
CAUTION: Do not drill holes in any pressure containing components for any reason.
An alternative method to attach clamps to compressor cylinders is to use an epoxy resin. Many
adhesives will likely work, but Ariel has tested some of them. After testing, Ariel can recommend Loctite
331 or Loctite 332 applied to clean, unpainted metal.
Follow all manufacturer instructions and recommendations to prepare the area for the adhesive. The
clamp and unpainted surface can be painted after the adhesive cures. With this method of clamp
attachment, there is no danger of compromising cylinder integrity.
REV: 07/19 Page I-1 of 1

Ariel JGK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ariel JGK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ariel JGK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAINTENANCE &

JGE / JGH / JGK / JGT

Cylinder Lubrication Paper Test 3-36

REV: 07/19 iii

Long Two-Compartment Intermediate Packing 4-29

SECTION 6 - COMPRESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING

General Safety for Reciprocating Compressors

CAUTION: Noise generated by reciprocating machinery may damage hearing.

CAUTION: Where applicable, compressor installation must conform to Zone 1

CAUTION: Suction or discharge valves installed in improper locations may result

Throw and Data Plate Locations

REV: 07/19 vii

Other Ariel Resources

Ariel Technical and Service Schools

Ariel Contact Information

Ariel Response Center 888-397-7766 740-397-1060 [email protected]

Order Entry 740-397-3856 --

Ariel World HQ 740-397-0311 740-397-3856 [email protected]

Technical Services [email protected]

viii REV: 07/19

Ariel Separately Purchased Tools

Ariel Separately Purchased Tool Kits

Page 1-2 of 4 REV: 07/19

c. 3/8" square drive wrench set, including:

l 12-piece, 12-point socket set, 5/16” to 1” l Ball type universal joint

l 14-piece, 12-point socket set, 7/16” to 1- l 10-1/4” ratchet

l 18-piece, 12-point socket set, 3/4” to 2” l 24” ratchet

REV: 07/19 Page 1-3 of 4

Page 1-4 of 4 REV: 07/19

TABLE 2-1 Required Instrumentation Summary

INSTRUMENT SUPPLIER SETTING/REQUIREMENT

Oil Pressure Packager

l Run Permissive 45 psig (3.1 barg) within 10 seconds of start

l Alarm 50 psig (3.4 barg)

l Shutdown 45 psig (3.1 barg)

Oil Temperature Packager

l Minimum, operating 150°F (66°C)

l Maximum, shutdown 190°F (88°C)

INSTRUMENT SUPPLIER SETTING/REQUIREMENT

Crankcase Level Packager 1/2 to 2/3 sight glass level

l Low Level Shutdown 1/4 sight glass level

Main Bearing Temp. Ariel Recommended, but optional.

Packing Case Temp. Ariel Optional

l Alarm +20°F (11°C) above normal

l Shutdown +30°F (17°C) above normal

Packing Case Vent Packager Optional

l Vent Flow Alarm 2 - 4 scfm (per throw)

l Vent Flow Shutdown > 4 scfm (per throw)

Scrubber Liquid Level Packager

l High Liquid Level Control

l High Liquid Level Shutdown

Gas Conditions Packager

l Inlet Temperature Indicator, each cylinder

l Inlet Pressure Indicator, each stage

l Discharge Pressure Indicator, each stage

l High Discharge Temperature 10% above normala

l Lubricated Cylinders 350°F (177°C)

l Non-Lube/PRC Cylinders 325°F (163°C)

l Hydrogen Rich > 50% < 0.41 Specific 300°F (149°C)